Quarterlytics / Education & Training Services / Learning Technologies Group plc

Learning Technologies Group plc

ltg · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker ltg
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry Education & Training Services
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2020 Annual Report · Learning Technologies Group plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
0
2
0
2

t
r

o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

l

c
p
p
u
o
G

r

i

l

s
e
g
o
o
n
h
c
e
T
g
n
n
r
a
e
L

i

ltgplc.com

UK

London  
Brighton  
Sheffield

Hungary

Budapest

Canada

Montréal, QC

Colombia

Bogotá

USA

Austin, TX 
 Irving, TX  
Jacksonville, FL 
 Nashville, TN 
Raleigh, NC 
 Waltham, MA 
Salt Lake City, UT

Australia

Adelaide 
Melbourne

India

Bangalore

Hong Kong

Learning Technologies Group plc

ANNUAL 
REPORT
2020

For the year ended 31 December 2020 
 
 
 
 
 
Introduction  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  Introduction

Driving learning and talent 
for business performance

LTG integrates a group of best-in-class product and service companies in talent and learning 
that are ideal for a dispersed workforce. We have proven ability to help close the gap between 
an organisation’s current and future workforce capability.

In addition, our software and service offerings extend beyond the customers’ direct workforces, into their supply and distribution 
chains. This reflects the evolution in traditional boundaries of learning and talent management. The sophistication of our 
products and their ability to be configured to other systems enables us to fit solutions into our customers’ processes, not the 
other way around.

This partnership of strategic thinking and technology provides a competitive advantage in a supply market which often fails to 
recognise the requirements of complex organisations in complex settings. As a result of recent acquisitions, LTG is now able to 
address a much greater proportion of the market across a broader geographical presence.

CONTENT & 
SERVICES

SOFTWARE & 
PLATFORMS

Closing the 
gap between 
current and 
future workforce 
capability

Digital transformation 
continues to change 
how organisations 
operate and behave. 

The employee experience, 
as well as upskilling and 
reskilling, are becoming 
critical boardroom priorities. 
As the workforce moves to 
more remote working, some 
of the new approaches to 
work – especially the way 
people learn – will continue 
to change at pace.

“Pandemic boosts business case for investing in staff.
Finance chiefs must prioritise talent retention as the 
economy starts to rebound.”

Financial Times  
January 2021 

Respondents to the Q3 2020 CFO Signals survey 
ranked “retention of key talent” among their most 
pressing concerns.

Deloitte CFO survey  
September 2020

“To most leaders, building employee skills is the best 
way to close the capability gap.”

McKinsey  
November 2020

Introduction  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  Introduction

LTG at the 
heart of 
learning 
and talent 
innovation

We focus on real 
problems that companies 
and government bodies  
face around the world,  
taking great pride in 
thinking ahead to the  
next challenge and  
its resolution.

Innovation is in our DNA – from our 
investment in R&D to our approach to 
acquisitions. LTG threads data into the 
decisions businesses take to recruit, 
evolve and empower their people – in 
every language and region.

The challenge for companies and government bodies is dynamic and the 
events of the last year have accelerated the need for the products and 
services that LTG businesses offer in so many ways because they enable...

...a great employee experience 
for people working remotely

...the ability to give and receive 
performance feedback at the 
same time as identifying skills in 
an agile way

...career progression (for the 
individual) mapped to the future 
skills requirement (for the business)

…impactful learning 
experiences in an increasingly 
virtual workplace

...measurement and 
visualisation of the business 
impact of learning

...the link between recruitment, 
learning, performance and 
retention

...learning for external 
stakeholders beyond the direct 
workforce

...creation, search and collaboration 
of user-generated content to augment 
operational learning in new ways

...the crossover between 
education and the 
workplace

...and the ability to do all of the above (to the extent required) at 
different market sizes: large enterprise, mid-market and small.

Contents  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  Contents

Table of Contents

Chairman’s Statement

01

Case Studies

03

Growth Strategy

13

Strategic Report for the year ended 31 December 2020

15

Corporate Governance Report

35

Report of the Audit & Risk Committee

39

Report of the Remuneration Committee

Directors’ Report for the year ended 31 December 2020

Directors’ Responsibilities Statement in respect of the Annual Report and the Financial Statements

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of Learning Technologies Group plc

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

Consolidated Statement of Financial Position

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity

Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2020

41

49

52

53

60

61

63

64

65

Company Statement of Financial Position

114

Company Statement of Changes in Equity

115

Notes to the Company Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2020

116

Glossary

120

Company Information

122

1  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  2

Chairman’s statement

At our January trading update we were pleased to confirm that results 
for 2020 would see us report a resilient performance with revenue, 
adjusted EBIT 1 and cash ahead of market expectations. In 2020 we 
continued to make excellent progress with our strategy to build a global 
leader in software and services in the learning and talent sectors to 
meet growing demand from corporate and government customers.

During 2020, LTG broadened its offering and addressable 
market significantly. Notably, the acquisitions of Open LMS, 
eCreators and eThink have given us a large-scale capability 
in the open-source Moodle™ market. This enables us to offer 
open-source Learning Management System (‘LMS’) solutions 
alongside our broad range of proprietary software products, 
address new customers, sell new solutions to existing 
customers, and deepen our presence in Latin America, 
Australia and North America. We expect this to improve the 
growth profile of the Group, as it becomes less concentrated 
on the large-enterprise market. The acquisitions of Bridge, 
PDT Global and Reflektive in 2021 further strengthen our 
expansion into the mid-market.

Our share placing in May raised c.£81.8 million in gross 
proceeds to take advantage of the opportunity to accelerate 
future growth and gain further share of the c.$358 billion2 
corporate learning market, and the talent management 
market. At the placing LTG introduced new strategic financial 
objectives to achieve run-rate revenues of c.£230 million and 
run-rate adjusted EBIT of c.£66 million by the end of 2022 and 
we are on track to meet these objectives.

Revenues in 2020 increased by 2% on a statutory basis. This 
included a decrease of 8% on an organic constant currency 
basis, which was more than offset by the contribution from 
acquisitions in the year. As anticipated, our Software & 
Platforms division saw high growth across the majority of our 
platforms, offset by a year-on-year decline in large enterprise 

solutions due to deployment delays during COVID-19. 
Also as anticipated, our Content & Services division saw 
revenues decline by 24% on a like-for-like basis as corporates 
postponed certain projects. Content & Services sales have 
performed very strongly in the past six months, and we 
expect this division to return to 2019 levels in the coming 
year. Adjusted EBIT was £40.3 million (2019: £41.0 million), with 
adjusted EBIT margins of 30.5% (2019: 31.5%). Adjusted diluted 
EPS decreased by 1% to 4.294 pence (2019: 4.351 pence). 
Over the last five years the Group has delivered compound 
annual growth of 50% in adjusted diluted EPS. The Group’s net 
cash position at 31 December 2020 of £70.2 million (2019: 
£3.8 million) was ahead of market expectations. This was 
primarily due to our continued strong operating  
cash conversion.

Environment, Social and Governance 
(‘ESG’)
In 2020 LTG made a concerted effort to review and extend 
best practice in its ESG initiatives and report more fully on 
measures in place. More importantly, LTG also empowers its 
clients to achieve their ESG priorities. As a business that helps 
companies to manage and develop their human capital, our 
platforms and services have helped to directly improve the 
talent development of more than 200 million people around 
the world during the past year. We provide more detail on this 
in the new ESG section of this report.

1 Denotes first instance of an Alternative Performance Measure (‘APM’) term defined and explained in the Glossary on page 120.

2 ©2021, Training Industry, Inc

Current trading and outlook
Current trading for the year has started well and in line with 
management expectations. We expect a strong recovery 
in our Content & Services division, reflecting excellent 
momentum for sales in the past six months. 

LTG has made three acquisitions in 2021 so far, Reflektive, 
PDT Global and Bridge, deploying the balance of the capital 
raised in 2020 and further increasing the proportion of Group 
recurring revenues. LTG’s balance sheet remains strong, with 
net cash of c.£25 million at the end of February, and the  
Board continues to pursue an exciting pipeline of further 
acquisition opportunities.

We have made clear progress in our ambition to serve 
small, mid-size and enterprise tier clients with our targeted, 
multi-product solutions. The appreciation by corporates of 
the necessity, appropriateness and effectiveness of digital 
learning and talent management solutions will, in the Board’s 
view, lead to increased levels of spending in 2021 and 
beyond, as the impact of lockdowns starts to recede. 

Board matters, dividend and Annual 
General Meeting
On 1 October 2020 Simon Boddie joined the Board as our 
fourth Non-Executive Director (‘NED’). Simon’s appointment 
brings supplemental expertise to the Group including 
experience of acquisitions and integrations in emerging 
markets. This appointment takes the number of Board 
members and officers to eight, of whom four are NEDs and 
three are women.

The Board is committed to a progressive dividend policy. 
Based on strong cash generation and an improved 
trading outlook and promising recent acquisitions, the 
Board is confident about the year ahead. It is therefore 
recommending a final dividend of 0.50 pence per share 
(2019: 0.50 pence), giving a total dividend for the year of 0.75 
pence per share, in line with the prior year.

If approved the final dividend will be paid on 25 June 2021 to 
all shareholders on the register at 4 June 2021. 

The Board looks forward to updating shareholders on progress 
during 2021. The Annual General Meeting will be held on 26 
May 2021. 

Andrew Brode
Chairman

24 March 2021

3  

 plc Annual Report 2020

Case study
Healthcare

Case study
Financial services

 plc Annual Report 2020  4

Nebraska Medicine

Comerica Incorporated

Saving hours of effort and improving safety on the wards with an automated 
environmental rounding program

Transforming compliance to competitive advantage through award-winning 
diversity insights and affirmative action planning services

The challenge 

The solution 

Nebraska Medicine operates two hospitals and 40 health 
centres across metropolitan Omaha and the surrounding 
region, employing 8,000 medical staff and 1,000 doctors. 
With a close research and education partnership to the 
University of Nebraska Medical Center, Nebraska Medicine 
has built an international reputation in the domains of 
cancer care, organ transplantation and infectious disease.

Nebraska Medicine built a support ticket process for 
environmental safety auditing, a critical regulatory 
requirement in the US. However, the entry and merging 
processes were intensely manual – around 20 minutes 
per the roughly 250 observed areas, monthly. The team 
sought improved efficiency, quicker time to intervention and 
greater utilisation.

By combining Watershed’s Learning Record Store and 
Analytics Platform with Xapiapps, a mobile checklist app 
that captures xAPI learning data, Nebraska Medicine 
gained real-time data access, intervention measurement 
and greater overall efficiency.

The healthcare industry is a largely deskless employer. Giving 
staff the opportunity to tick boxes on a mobile device at 
point of discovery, and have that feed asynchronously into 
a central store is more efficient and convenient than entry 
and consolidation via spreadsheet. The new automated 
environmental rounds programme created similar 
efficiencies for auditors, managers and learning leaders via 
Watershed’s reports and always-on dashboards.

The results

The convenience of the solution means frontline staff 
more regularly collect data, and managers are more 
frequently reviewing and intervening. Since launching the 
programme in January 2020, collection and presentation 
turnaround time has more than halved. The innovative 
new system caught the attention of Safety National, which 
awarded Nebraska Medicine a reimbursement grant 
in December 2020 for its potential to reduce the risk of 
employee injury and illness.

“When you’re reporting out to leadership, 
being able to capture data in that moment 
is really powerful as opposed to going 
back days later. Having the ability to look 
at it and see the qualitative alongside 
quantitative is really valuable.”

Nebraska Medicine Office of Health Professions Education

- Frank Pietrantoni, Director,  

The challenge 

Comerica, one of the largest US banks, operates more 
than 400 banking centres in three strategic business 
segments (commercial banking, retail banking and wealth 
management) across North and Central America. As 
a financial services company with 8,000+ employees, 
compliance is vital to Comerica’s operations. It faced  
several concerns, including: 

•  Its affirmative action programme (AAP) preparation  
was overburdening the workforce compliance team.

•  Manual tracking of diversity metrics resulted in 

redundant reporting efforts.

•  HR and executive leadership needed visibility of 

diversity across the organisation.

•  A desire to extend the value of workforce data insights 

beyond regulatory compliance.

The solution 

Since 2004, the bank has relied on Affirmity to develop 
and support its affirmative action program; diversity 
benchmarking, analysis and reporting; and pay equity 
studies. Affirmity contributes ongoing training to Comerica’s 
compliance and HR teams, delivering multiple webinars 
each month on good faith efforts (GFEs), recruiting 
compliance and other important regulatory issues.

The results 

Today, Comerica can access a single source prepared by 
Affirmity experts for both compliance and diversity workforce 
data. Affirmity manages all aspects of AAP development 
and produces audit-ready AAPs for all Comerica locations 
within just 60 days – saving approximately four weeks of 
work. In recognition of its successful programme, Comerica 
earned a top-three ranking on the DiversityInc® regional 
companies list in 2020. 

Additionally:

•  Outsourcing AAP preparation frees up the compliance 

team for strategic planning.

•  Configurable diversity reports meet the needs of 

multiple stakeholders.

•  Centralised diversity analytics enable total visibility across 

the talent lifecycle.

•  Reliable metrics and routine monitoring maintain 

momentum toward diversity goals.

“With Affirmity’s help, we’ve built years 
of solid data on hiring, promotions, and 
retention. We’re able to clearly articulate 
to our executive leadership how we’re 
progressing toward goals.”

– Nate Bennett, Senior Vice President,  

Chief Diversity Officer, and Head of Talent Acquisition

5  

 plc Annual Report 2020

Case study
Education/Government

ICFES

 plc Annual Report 2020  6

Case study
Healthcare

VCU Health

Keeping learning alive during a pandemic with world-first, secure, large-scale 
simultaneous electronic examinations

Creating a simplified, streamlined digital programme for COVID-19 training  
in just seven days

The challenge 

The Colombian Institute for the Promotion of Higher 
Education (ICFES) is a regulator that helps implement 
national exams. When COVID-19 hit and the country went 
into lockdown, ICFES needed to continue monitoring the 
efficacy of its examinations for a suddenly off-campus 
national student base, including high school seniors, 
technical students, and undergraduates across the country.

With hundreds of thousands of students to serve, and given 
the five-hour-long nature of the exams, ICFES needed to 
ensure the quick and orderly delivery of exams and results, 
while ensuring the integrity of both.

The solution 

ICFES turned to CognosOnline, which chose Open LMS 
as its learning solution partner. Open LMS was selected 
for this project specifically for its high scalability, allowing 
for the execution of multiple exams securely and reliably. 
Through Open LMS, exams could be created in an intuitive 
and accessible way, and be easily adopted by individuals 
responsible for uploading exam questionnaires.

Open LMS also worked frictionlessly with Sumadi, the 
selected online proctoring company. Sumadi uses AI and 
facial recognition to monitor students for suspicious activity 
under exam conditions, including using prohibited devices, 
interacting with third parties or accessing other webpages.

The results

Successful execution of Open LMS and CognosOnline’s 
plan for ICFES made Colombia the first country in the 
world to carry out national-scale exams entirely digitally, 
remotely and simultaneously – a historic milestone for 
the country and learning technology itself. In total, there 
were 326,000 Saber Pro (undergraduate) and Saber TyT 
(technical) written exams, all delivered via Open LMS, with 
181 million photographic records recorded by Sumadi to 
prevent fraud.

The project cost less than the government would usually 
spend on face-to-face testing, and involved the training 
of 420 people in digital exam logistics and supervision. 
Results were delivered in just five days.

“Never before in the world has a 
virtual exam been carried out for so 
many individuals.”

- Fernelly Morales, CEO of CognosOnline

VCU Health Center additionally began leveraging the 
PeopleFluent LMS to create and send reports. Some of 
these reports went directly to Virginia’s governor and the 
Department of Health for national-level pandemic  
tracking purposes.

The challenge 

The Virginia, US-based VCU Health Center first partnered with 
PeopleFluent Learning in 2011. Pre-COVID, it used the Learning 
Management System (LMS) to add new learning modules at 
a rate of 1,000 per year. However, the organisation’s learning 
programmes were largely recorded via paper and pencil, 
and relied heavily on in-person training.

Once COVID-19 disruptions began, it became critical to 
rapidly deploy and track COVID-19 training for workers who 
were no longer able to attend in person. Learning and 
Development (L&D) leaders were given just a week to pivot 
and convert their manual learning programmes into a digital, 
accessible programme.

The results 

After converting the manual training programmes into 
online learning formats, the healthcare centre has seen 
consumption of learning content by its workers increase 
significantly. From compliance to orientation training, 
the centre provides essential education for 24,000 staff, 
including nurses, clinicians and C-level employees. The entire 
process has been simplified and digitised thanks to a flexible 
platform with the necessary functionality to deploy learning 
initiatives at scale.

In the first nine months of 2020, VCU Health Center  
leveraged the PeopleFluent LMS to create and send 150 
scheduled reports.

“I think we broke records.”

– Adrian Lamb, Learning System Administrator, VCU Health

The solution 

The PeopleFluent LMS presents VCU Health with the ability to 
deliver essential training via pre-recorded, online modules. 
Live sessions are enabled by video conferencing tools, and 
the healthcare centre can use the LMS to automatically 
send email invites to these users.

To help its 80 local healthcare unit partners keep pace and 
remain compliant, VCU Health Center created a small task 
force that used the PeopleFluent LMS to create and deploy 
COVID-19 education within the tight deadline.

7  

 plc Annual Report 2020

Case study
Education/Tech

BBC Earth

Using spatial computing to bring the natural world into people’s homes

The challenge 

Technologies such as Spatial Computing, Mixed Reality (MR) 
and Augmented Reality (AR) allow us to create experiences 
where digital and physical worlds fully interact with each 
other. They promise a planet-scale transformation of how 
we consume content and interact with our world.

To bring the power of this new technology to life, PRELOADED 
teamed up with BBC Studios to create a unique experience 
for the Magic Leap headset, a wearable spatial computer 
that overlays information in the user’s field of vision. 
Together, the teams set out to prove and refine the 
educational and storytelling potential of this new medium.

The solution 

BBC Earth – Micro Kingdoms: Senses merges users’ worlds 
with those of a Leaf Cutter Ant colony in the tropical 
rainforests of Central America and a Wandering Spider in 
the Atlantic Forest of Eastern Brazil. Narrated by Stephen 
Fry, the experience invites PRELOADED’s realistic creatures – 
modelled and animated using the BBC Natural History Unit’s 
archive material for reference – to walk over your table, 
around your sofa or even up your walls.

In two chapters, users are able to observe, interact with 
and learn how these animals have evolved extraordinary 
senses to help them survive and thrive. Creatures driven 
by AI are used to simulate animals’ natural reactions, 
helping audiences better understand and appreciate the 
extraordinary natural world.

The results

The final product is a spatial computing experience that 
promises to be an exciting new way to tell interactive 
stories and engage people with the natural world. The user 
experience, designed by PRELOADED, marries BBC Studios’ 
60 years of innovative storytelling with Magic Leap’s 
cutting-edge technology. 

This achievement was recognised when the highly 
prestigious World Congress of Science and Factual 
Producers awarded Micro Kingdoms the accolade of Most 
Innovative Factual Project, 2020.

“This experience is extraordinary because 
very quickly you forget that you’re wearing 
a machine. You are literally just in the world 
of these animals.”

- Doug Hope, Exec Producer BBC Studios Natural History Unit

 plc Annual Report 2020  8

Case study
Energy

Centrica

Efficiently and flexibly transforming e-learning creation at scale, and enabling  
a rapid remote learning pivot due to COVID-19

A 15-strong team was upskilled on using the tool to revamp 
the course catalogue – a year-long endeavour that 
replaced outdated material with hundreds of new pieces 
refined using Gomo, and built to serve the team’s new 
capability and job role mapping.

Centrica is a multi-layered organisation and the ability to 
provide links and assign reviewer roles to many different 
stakeholders also proved invaluable.

The challenge 

Centrica plc is an international energy services and solutions 
business, best known as operating under the names British 
Gas and Scottish Gas in the UK. Learning & Development 
(L&D) at Centrica is responsible for the depth and breadth of 
learning across the organisation’s 25,000+ global learners, a 
combination of field engineers, gas apprentices, call centre 
agents, and workers at head office.

Centrica required an efficient, scalable e-learning authoring 
tool that would support plans to build an in-house design 
team that is less reliant on external agencies. The tool’s 
output needed to support a desktop/mobile split between 
office workers and engineers in the field, and authoring 
needed to be accessible to non-L&D experts from around 
the business.

The results 

The tool’s ease of use and robust collaborative features have 
reduced turnaround times and Centrica is now creating 70% 
of its digital learning in-house. Having Gomo in place paid 
dividends during the 2020 coronavirus pandemic:

“The first couple of weeks were crucial: 
overnight our workers went fully remote. 
Without Gomo, we wouldn’t have been able to 
deploy our comms and learning at the pace 
that we did. Gomo enabled us to support our 
people in a moment of need with new COVID-
specific e-learning courses.”

– Pinda Dhillon, Director of Learning and Development

The solution 

Centrica’s new Director of L&D had championed Gomo 
in her previous role at a telecommunications company. 
Gomo allowed the team to quickly and intuitively build 
courses that were accessible on desktop, laptop, mobile 
and tablet.

9  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  10

Empowering 
LTG customers 
to achieve 
their ESG 
priorities

Most of what Learning Technologies 
Group does for its customers fits ESG 
principles, as it has impact on Human 
Capital Development (HCM). In the case 
of Affirmity and PDT Global, their work 
fits both HCM and Diversity, Equity and 
Inclusion (DE&I). 

So, with an overall reach with Learning and Talent 
products and services to more than 53 million people 
(not including Rustici who provide the interoperability 
software in more than 70% of the worlds learning systems 
that reach a further 167 million people), ESG sits at the 
heart of LTG’s market provision.

Within these numbers, LTG’s work with the charitable,  
NGO and healthcare sectors reaches more than 1.7  
million people.

The kind of supply ranges from systems by PeopleFluent 
to organisations like Humentum, which allow NGOs 
around the world to distribute their learning (300 

Using play and new technologies 
to make complex subject matter 
engaging and understandable to 
global audiences – be that climate 
change, sustainability, mental 
health, well-being, enterprise skills 
or educational learning.

Using data to make learning more 
efficient and saving waste – impacting 
>167 million people globally.

Reducing the need to travel for learning by providing 
learning systems to 10.6 million people in 44 countries, 
including a number of global charities such as 
Humentum, which provides more than 150 learning 
programmes to the NGO community globally. 

Helping over 1,100 companies 
achieve workforce equity through 
solutions that optimise affirmative 
action and diversity, equity and 
inclusion programmes.

,

Providing Environmental, Social and 
Governance learning content for 
3 million people globally, making 
people safer (courses include 
Health & Safety, Cyber & Data 
Security, Tackling Modern Day 
Slavery and Anti-Harassment) and 
supporting compliance needs 
through topics including Personal 
Ethics, Whistleblowing, Anti-Bribery, 
Consumer Protection and Diversity 
Equity & Inclusion. 

Reaching 8 million Higher and 
Further Education students globally 
so they can receive high-quality, 
interactive learning remotely.

workshops, e-learning offerings, and webinars) to content 
design and creation for the World Health Organization 
on topics like health financing to help teams understand 
different healthcare models. We have also recently been 
involved in helping field managers working for a global 
children’s charity apply a decision support tool during 
large-scale immunisation programmes. 

As part of our ESG work, we also supply systems and content 
pro bono. Examples include The Glass Door Homeless 
Charity (onboarding for 1,500 volunteers), and World Cancer 
Day 2021 (using Instilled to support Macmillan Jersey). 

We are also proud of the work we have done for 
organisations such as The Humanitarian Leadership 
Academy, the Hemophilia Federation of America (HFA) 
and The Prince’s Trust.

In a recent project for Save the Children, PRELOADED is 
creating a learning game for frontline humanitarian field 
managers to develop a range of competencies and 
learning outcomes to support their work in the field. This will 
launch as a pilot in 2021.

Two ESG case studies are on the following two pages:

 
 
11  

 plc Annual Report 2020

Case study - ESG
Healthcare/education

Case study - ESG
Healthcare

 plc Annual Report 2020  12

Oxford University

Using a game to enable young people to have a voice in the mental health debate

Resuscitation Council UK

A four-day turnaround to help rapidly deliver essential, life-saving COVID-19 
training

The challenge 

The subject of prediction, early intervention and data 
privacy in mental health raises a lot of ethical considerations 
and, due to its academic nature, young people are often 
left out of a critical debate that will likely impact their future. 
Oxford University partnered with PRELOADED to understand 
how a game could be used as a vehicle to include young 
people in an important and ongoing debate that concerns 
their future.

The teams were presented with a unique challenge: could  
a game be both engaging as a play experience on a  
complex subject matter, while helping to collect meaningful  
data from the target audience to inform research?

The solution 

The result of the collaboration was Tracing Tomorrow, a first-
person, narrative-led exploration of the consequences of 
sharing mental health data. The storytelling mode, along 
with a succession of important and engaging decisions – 
with no correct answers – was chosen in order to motivate 
players to progress and explore the topic.

In the background, the game collected anonymised 
player demographics, gameplay choices, and gameplay 
analytics (before, during and after play) in order to assist in 
two key research objectives:

•  Furthering the debate surrounding mental health 

prediction ethics.

•  Proving the degree to which an interactive digital 

platform can be successful in both gathering research 
and delivering information.

.

The results

The finished product is a seamless synthesis of data 
research, emotional storytelling, and exploration of a 
weighty, current topic. Within four weeks of launch, the 
game had already delivered meaningful results. Over 
15,000 young people had played the game, with a 
completion rate of 41%. This is considerably higher than 
the average completion rate for similar content produced 
as a non-interactive 30-second video (20%).

Most importantly the game, supported by a wider 
influencer marketing campaign, encouraged conversation 
among young people around mental health topics.

“Such an interesting concept! Really 
well produced and left me thinking a 
lot about my choices!”

- @harveypoxon on Twitter

The challenge 

The results 

Working through the weekend, RCUK, LEO, Gomo, and 
PeopleFluent staff delivered the solution four days after 
briefing. By Thursday 16 April, the training had been 
accessed by 1,300 users.

“We contacted LEO Learning at a time of 
great urgency and were impressed with the 
suggestion of using the Instilled LXP and Gomo. 
We were quickly trained in how to use the LXP 
and pleased with how easily learners can get 
access to everything they need.”

- Sultana Begum Ali, e-Learning Product and  

Development Manager at Resuscitation Council UK

Early in the COVID-19 global pandemic, the UK government’s 
Project Nightingale response plan called for emergency field 
hospitals staffed by around 20,000 former NHS clinicians. 
Resuscitation Council UK (RCUK) was approached by a 
member of the team at NHS Nightingale, ExCeL London, on 
Wednesday 25 March, requiring resuscitation-specific digital 
course content for 30 March.

This content needed to be relevant to the NHS returners and 
the COVID-19 response. On top of the tight deadline, the 
returning clinicians wouldn’t be enrolled in RCUK’s systems 
and could be unfamiliar with digital learning environments.

The solution 

Thanks to a decade-long relationship with LEO Learning 
hosting and supporting RCUK’s learning platform, the 
organisation contacted LEO, who devised a solution 
using LTG’s Learning Experience Platform (LXP), Instilled by 
PeopleFluent. A six-month, 100,000+ user license for the LXP 
was provided free of charge.

Pivotal features included:

•  Flexibility: Format and hosting parameters were not yet 
defined. Instilled’s wide-ranging compatibility covered 
all eventualities.

•  Self-service login: Instilled could automatically and 
securely manage logins independently of RCUK’s 
systems.

•  Ease of use: Instilled presents content similarly to 
familiar video platforms, with integrated content 
recommendations and social features.

•  Easy deployment: New users can be trained rapidly in 

the use of Instilled’s intuitive systems.

The content was built using Gomo to be viewable on 
any device, anywhere. The initial five module course was 
adapted from RCUK resuscitation course material and 
included elements such as a field-downloadable COVID-
19-specific algorithm for life support application.

13  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  14

Growth strategy

Learning Technologies Group’s ambition to build a global market leader in the 
digital learning and talent management software sector remains undiminished. 

Despite the headwinds of recession caused by the COVID-19 crisis, we will 
focus on the emerging recovery, building the business through a mix of organic 
growth, strategic cross-selling and acquisitions. This will enable us to provide 
market-leading solutions to meet the increasingly demanding expectations of 
corporate and government customers.

I

S
E
C
V
R
E
S

&

T
N
E
T
N
O
C

S
M
R
O
F
T
A
L
P
&
E
R
A
W

T
F
O
S

Learning services - content and blends, learning campaigns, capability building and 
system implementation.

Learning services for global risk and compliance - specialists in training for 
financial services and investment banking.

Immersive learning - play with purpose, learning games, augmented and virtual reality.

Workforce compliance, diversity, equity and inclusion - US market-leader for 
affirmative action planning now combined with PDT DEI learning and change specialists.

Integrated talent management in the cloud - Recruitment, performance, 
engagement, succession, compensation and learning solutions for large, mid-size 
and small enterprises.

Learning creation and distribution - SaaS product for learning creation and 
distribution, inclusive of authoring, delivery and analytics.

Technical interoperability - world leader in system interoperability and  
technical standards.

Analytics and measurement - industry-leading learning record store with powerful 
visualisation for management decision-making.

Contingent workforce management system - to control costs, maintain compliance, 
and drive efficiency.

Open-source LMS and support for higher education/corporate customers - 
flexible and scalable learning platform to address diverse student and faculty needs.

The core focus is to develop and innovate Group businesses 
in the learning and talent software sector. We will broaden 
capability, extend geographical reach and increase 
specialist industry expertise. As well as finding domain-
specific businesses that have reach and relationships into 
new client bases, we will increasingly join our newly-acquired 
technologies to suit a range of different customer types and 
sizes, with particular focus on the growing mid-enterprise market.

We will continue to extend our range of software and services 
to ensure LTG’s offering is comprehensive and differentiated 
from the industry. Our base of 5,000 customers is fertile 
ground. The demand for the number of services and products 
being pulled from across the Group by our customers 
highlights the potential; the average number of products 
taken by our clients during 2020 increased by 7%. We will 
continue to build on this over the coming years.

With our Group capability to provide insight to customers via 
measurement and analytics, first-class customer service, 
and a focus on customer results, we will seek to maximise 
effectiveness and value for all our stakeholders. 

Given our relative financial strength and commercial diversity, 
we will seek to combine sensible acquisitions with new areas 
of research and development. As one of only a handful of 
consolidators, we see an opportunity in the coming months 
to strengthen our capability to meet the growing global 
corporate demand for scale and reach in a supply market 
that remains fragmented.

I C S   A N D   MEASURE

M

E

N

T

T

Y

L

A

N

A

Learning 
services

Risk & 
Compliance

Immersive 
learning 
(Games, 
VR & AR)

Learning 
creation & 
distribution

E N T  & SERVIC

T

E

S

N

O

C

Learning 
management 

Recruitment

S

O

FT

WARE & P L A T

M S

R

O

F

Diversity 
Equity & 
Inclusion

Compensation

Performance & 
engagement

Succession

 
 
 
 
15  

 plc Annual Report 2020

Strategic report

For the year ended 31 December 2020

Chief Executive’s review

Market overview
The learning and talent management markets are highly 
fragmented and fast evolving. There are a large number of 
specialised operators, but few are able to offer a full range 
of products and services, enabling them to orchestrate the 
kind of holistic solutions required by leading corporations or 
government organisations. LTG is a specialised product  
and services provider that can address these more 
demanding needs with broader, data-driven solutions to  
help drive successful workforce development and 
transformation outcomes.

Five forces are driving the need for corporates and 
governments to reskill and transform their workforces: the 
complexity of business and work; the pace of change; 
unprecedented demographic shifts; the need to compete 
through productivity; and changing relationships to work.

Changing Relationship 
to Work

The Complexity of 
The Complexity of 
Business and Work 
Business and Work 

5Seismic

Forces

The Pace 
of Change

The Need to 
Compete through 
Productivity

The global corporate training market was estimated to be 
worth approximately $358 billion 3 in 2020 and is forecast to 
grow at approximately 3% in 2021. A survey conducted by 
LTG in December 2020 suggested that 78% of respondents 
expect 2021 training budgets to increase by more than 
3%. The training market includes many product and service 
offerings ranging from traditional formats such as classroom 
training through various types of learning content and delivery 
platforms. LTG is focused on the outsourced digital learning 
segment of this market which is disrupting the more  
traditional methodologies.

3 2020 Market Sizing - Source: Training Industry, Inc. Research Data

4 Original EBIT target set at £55 million before adjusting for share-based payments and IFRS16

 plc Annual Report 2020  16

The complementary talent management market refers to the 
wide array of integrated applications that help companies 
to optimise the recruitment, performance management, 
learning & development, diversity and inclusion and 
compensation management of employees. This software 
enables companies to track individual employees from the 
date of hiring through the complete employee lifecycle in 
the organisation, facilitating employee engagement and 
retention as well as helping companies to align their business 
strategies with the professional development of their  
workforce. LTG is meeting the needs of organisations to  
reskill their workforces and close the gap between current and 
future capability. 

Strategic Goals
In November 2018, the Board announced its ambition to 
achieve run-rate revenues of £200 million and run-rate 
adjusted EBIT of at least £51 million by the end of 2021, under 
LTG’s current accounting policies 4. This target still stands, and 
the Board is confident about achieving these stated goals 
based on the Group’s underlying performance supported by 
the acquisitions made during 2020 and early 2021.

On 28 May 2020 LTG announced a share placing that 
raised £81.8 million in gross proceeds at a share price of 
127.0 pence. In 2020 LTG introduced new strategic financial 
objectives to achieve run-rate revenues of circa £230 million 
and run-rate adjusted EBIT of circa £66 million by the end of 
2022. As before, LTG intends to meet these financial objectives 
through a combination of organic growth and additional 
strategic acquisitions that are complementary to the current 
business, financed through the proceeds of the May 2020 
placing, operating cash flows and moderate debt leverage, 
but without further dilution to shareholders.

The purpose of the May 2020 placing was to take advantage 
of the macroeconomic backdrop to accelerate future 
growth within the growing corporate talent development 
market. The funds raised were to be used to finance a 
12-month pipeline of acquisition opportunities in a highly 
fragmented market where LTG’s management believed 
high-quality assets were becoming available at compelling 
valuation levels. As at the date of this report, the Company 
has delivered on this objective. 

The Group continues to target highly relevant acquisitions 
in both the Software & Platforms and Content & Services 
segments. Our strategy is to expand into new areas of the 
talent management ecosystem, acquire best-of-breed 
products and build a multi-solution offering for our clients 
that combines specialist products with class-leading advisory 
services. We aim to achieve a level of quality, functionality 
and experience in both software and services that enables 
us to provide customers with a unique and valuable offering. 

The Directors further believe that COVID-19 will accelerate 
these trends by creating a greater willingness to continue 
to use digital learning in place of classroom formats and a 
greater desire to manage human capital more efficiently and 
effectively in a more remote-working world.

broadening its ecosystem offering to an extensive and 
growing customer base that was not previously served. The 
acquisitions also substantially extend LTG’s geographical 
footprint to Latin America and Australia. 

Revenue by geography

UK

N. America

RoW

12%

20%

11% 16%

2019

68%

2020

73%

We will continue to evaluate strategic acquisitions of scale that 
would be additive to the targets outlined above. Strict criteria 
are used in assessing all acquisitions including the financial 
effects, integration risk and prospective returns.

Expanding the Group’s market 
opportunity with open-source software
Two key elements of LTG’s acquisition strategy are to expand its 
addressable market and to focus on cross-selling opportunities 
for its largest 50 customers to build a global market leader in 
the digital learning and talent management software sector. 
Part of this strategy is to build a substantial open-source 
software (‘OSS’) offering to complement LTG’s large enterprise, 
mid- and small-market proprietary software solutions. Many 
clients have a requirement for a flexible, value-for-money 
orientated LMS solution which they can either develop, host 
and service themselves or which they can partner with a 
trusted agency to deliver their chosen OSS solution.

During 2020, through the execution of three acquisitions, 
the Group became the largest global supplier of expertise, 
hosting and services for the market’s leading open-source 
LMS, Moodle™. The purchase of Open LMS in March 2020, 
followed by the acquisition and integration of eCreators and 
eThink under the Open LMS brand, has made LTG the global 
leader in this market. LTG aims to professionalise this market 
by bringing scalable hosting expertise, world-class service 
delivery levels and complementary products and services 
whilst also championing the ideals of the open-source market 
by making its OSS products truly available to all.

In addition to giving LTG a significant presence in the open-
source market, these acquisitions have enabled the Group 
to address new higher education customers, as well as 

Investment Case
The Group provides investors with access to organic growth, 
high levels of profitability, strong cash generation and a 
proven acquisition strategy in a growing and fragmented 
market with plentiful opportunities for the future.

Each business in the LTG family brings a component of the 
best-in-class expertise required to drive strategic results for 
our customers. These include specialist solutions across 
recruitment, learning, performance, learning analytics, 
succession, compensation, vendor management, diversity 
& inclusion, immersive virtual, augmented and mixed reality 
experiences, as well as consulting on how to combine all of 
these together in pursuit of business performance goals. The 
complexity of workforce transformation demands integrated 
products with broad and rich functionality and highly-skilled 
staff to deliver a complete solution. LTG has made strong 
progress in recent years to build an increasingly unique set of 
capabilities that we believe others will find hard to match.

It remains our intention to leverage the technical and 
professional capabilities we have already developed by 
deepening our presence in specific geographical markets, 
particularly the US; expanding our global offering in highly 
regulated, high consequence vertical markets, such as life 
sciences, healthcare, energy, automotive, finance and 
aviation; and broadening and deepening our offering to 
existing customers. 

LTG continues its aim to deliver strong earnings growth over 
the medium to long term through a combination of top-
line organic growth, appropriate cost control, investment in 
innovation, robust operating cash conversion and strategic 
M&A, as well as improving the operating business models 
and performance of the businesses that we acquire. We 
believe that certain structural trends are increasing demand 
for our solutions and COVID-19 has acted as an accelerator 
of these trends by driving increased use of digital learning 
and online working.

Strategy and Business Model
Since its inception in 2013, LTG has grown to become a market 
leader in the fast-growing workplace digital learning and 
talent management markets. The Group now employs just 
over 1,100 people in 15 locations across Europe, the United 
States, Asia-Pacific and South America.

We continue to pursue our strategy of helping organisations 
to adopt learning at a strategic level. ‘Moving learning to the 
heart of business strategy’ is achieved through our end-to-end 

17  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  18

Strategic report (continued)

For the year ended 31 December 2020

service offering which enables us to partner with global clients 
throughout the creation, implementation and maintenance 
of their learning strategies. We aim to deliver transformational 
results through learning innovation and the effective use 
of the best available learning and talent management 
technologies. For the fifth successive year LTG has been 
named as a ‘Strategic Leader’ in the respected industry 
analyst Fosway Digital Learning report 5. 

High recurring revenue

Recurring

Non-recurring

26%

19%

2019
2020

74%

2020
2020

81%

The management team has a proven track record of 
delivering and integrating 16 acquisitions over the past seven 
years to February 2021, increasing scale and capabilities 
across multiple geographies, and contributing materially 
to shareholder value. LTG’s acquisition approach is to 
either acquire fast-growing businesses with strong software 
and/or services and high-quality leadership, or to take on 
underperforming businesses with strong underlying assets and 
drive improvements in the operating model, integrating with 
LTG’s core capabilities and focusing on managing the cost 
base, improving utilisation and margins, and driving strong 
cash generation.

The Directors expect that acquisitions are most likely to  
come from its well-researched and developed pipeline  
of target companies.

During 2020 LTG’s capabilities were extended to the high-
growth, Moodle™ open-source LMS market, and our offering 
for small and mid-sized customers was strengthened. LTG 
now has the capability to deliver multiple best-of-breed SaaS 
solutions encompassing talent acquisition (recruitment and 
onboarding), talent management (performance, succession, 
compensation, diversity and inclusion and organisational 
planning), organisational agility (talent mobility and 
engagement), and market leading learning management, 
data analytics and self-authoring tools.

5 https://www.fosway.com/9-grid/digital-learning-2-2/

Investment in innovation for long- 
term growth
LTG continues to innovate in two principal domains. The first 
is working with customers and partners to build bespoke 
solutions in real environments. Rather than invest in speculative 
solutions, LTG prefers to partner with clients to build innovative 
solutions, using real data to prove genuine business impact. 
The second domain relates to the rationalisation of an 
expanding product portfolio so that products gradually move 
towards each other and we are able to deliver more valuable 
and cohesive solutions. 

Recent examples of moving products towards each other have 
included the integration of Instilled’s next-generation Learning 
Experience Platform (LXP) with PeopleFluent. This has allowed 
PeopleFluent customers to elevate their users’ experiences 
by enabling them to build, share and recommend content, 
empowering them to create their own ‘learning journeys’. 
Another example has been sharing the success of Breezy’s mid-
market recruitment software capabilities with the PeopleFluent 
Recruiting enterprise solution. 

LTG has three key principles underlying its R&D strategy. ‘Never 
in isolation’ means that products are kept customer and 
market informed, particularly for customers that indicate 
conviction through their spending. Applying ‘familiar 
technology’ via new approaches is a low-risk way to apply 
existing technology to different markets. Rustici for example 
has used this principle to create a new line of business 
with dual focus: multi-LMS support for organisations and 
support for the extended enterprise; delivering content to 
different audiences. The third principle is to ‘invent only when 
appropriate’. An example of this is PRELOADED’s application of 
XR (extended reality including AR and VR) technologies.

As well as re-invigorating established software solutions, LTG 
has also developed new products to address changing 
requirements in the marketplace. With more than 5,000 
customers LTG has excellent market access which allows 
for real-time insights that, when combined with the Group’s 
specialist expertise and R&D capacity, allow for the fast 
evolution of new and innovative products and services 
underpinned by an understanding of demand requirements. 
This particularly suits large- and medium-sized ‘traditional’ 
businesses facing substantial transformation challenges 
in the coming years. For example, we have deployed 
PeopleFluent’s Instilled and Rustici’s Content Controller 
home-grown products into a range of new and existing 
customers including a large oil company that is transforming 
to becoming a global energy business.

Divisional review

Software & Platforms

The Software & Platforms division comprises SaaS and on-
premise licenced product solutions as well as hosting, support 
and maintenance services. 

Overview and performance

In 2020 Software & Platforms accounted for £100.0 million 
or 76% of Group revenues, up 13% from £88.6 million (68%) 
in 2019. This increase was primarily due to the nine-month 
maiden contribution from Open LMS. On an organic, constant 
currency basis revenues were flat for the year. As anticipated 
the enterprise talent management software market, where 
deployments can take 6-9 months, was briefly impacted 
by COVID-19 as corporates delayed procurement; this 
substantially affected PeopleFluent’s sales pipeline in the 
second and third quarters of 2020 where revenues declined 
compared with 2019. However, LTG’s other core software 
products showed strong growth in the year. 

The Software & Platforms division contributes 90% (2019: 89%) 
of the Group’s recurring revenues. Adjusted EBIT margins were 
lower at 32.2% versus 35.6% in 2019 due partly to acquisitions 
in the year delivering lower margins in the short term and 
a greater proportion of central overheads allocated to the 
division based on share of Group revenue.

Software & Platforms

EBIT

Revenue

EBIT Margin

£m

100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0

40%

35%

30%

25%

20%

15%

10%

2019

2020

For the Software & Platforms division 2020 was a year of 
demonstrable resilience with organic growth in the small 
and mid-size markets (‘SMB’) coupled with three acquisitions 
that brought global expertise in high-growth open-source 
solutions. Signs of our customers’ procurement processes 
being unlocked at the enterprise end of the market started to 
appear in the fourth quarter.

LTG strengthened its PeopleFluent talent development 
software offering in 2019 with the development and integration 
of the Instilled LXP providing a world-class user experience, 
and the integration of the market-leading Watershed Learning 

Analytics Platform (‘LAP’). In 2021 we are bringing Gomo, 
LTG’s cloud-based authoring and distribution platform 
which enables customers to create and deliver e-learning 
content online, in a device-agnostic manner, under the 
PeopleFluent umbrella. This move is designed to support 
team collaboration and further expand the Group’s offering 
horizontally, so that it can leverage LTG’s deep expertise and 
ecosystem-leading technologies into a multi-solution software 
and service offering with best-of-breed capabilities.

Breezy, the talent acquisition specialist acquired in April 2019, 
produced another excellent year in 2020. Breezy has a highly 
scalable, self-service, SaaS-based model serving the small 
and mid-size markets (‘SMB’). Breezy is currently focused on 
the self-service recruitment market but the Directors see 
an opportunity, working with PeopleFluent and the recently 
acquired Reflektive, to create a broader talent management 
solution for SMBs, with its own performance management and 
analytics offering. This will help LTG to build on Breezy’s success 
with a broader and differentiated offering in this high-growth 
market segment.

The Open LMS acquisition in April 2020, followed by the 
acquisition and integration of eCreators and eThink, has 
meant that LTG can now leverage open-source software to 
deliver an effective and engaging learning experience to 
a new segment of the market. As the largest commercial 
Moodle™ services provider in the world, Open LMS helps 
organisations and institutions deliver a dynamic and 
customisable learning platform designed to meet their 
specific needs. eThink brings a strong presence in North 
America, eCreators is the market leader in Australia, and 
combined with Open LMS’s presence in other emerging 
markets such as Latin America, the combined Open LMS 
business has a truly global footprint. 

LTG remains uniquely positioned as the global leader in 
e-learning standards through its Rustici business. This expertise 
is foundational to making digital learning and training content 
and platforms work together. Rustici therefore plays a key 
role across all facets of the learning technology space, from 
content creation and testing, to distribution and tracking. 
Rustici serves around 2,000 customers worldwide across the 
spectrum from learning platforms and content publishers to 
large organizations and government agencies. During 2020, 
increased demand for digital learning tools led to increased 
interest in standards-based solutions and this helped LTG to 
perform strongly once again in this area. 

LTG’s solutions in learning analytics are spearheaded by 
Watershed. Its SaaS products provide actionable insights to 
customers who want to adapt their learning strategies, create 
more effective learning experiences and ultimately generate 
verifiable business results. There are significant cross-selling 
opportunities with other LTG customers and Watershed has 
established itself as the proven leader in learning analytics, 

19  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  20

Strategic report (continued)

For the year ended 31 December 2020

with large-scale global deployments by many large 
corporates including Verizon, Johnson & Johnson and PwC. 

VectorVMS enables LTG to provide solutions to help clients 
manage all non-employee labour through the full sourcing 
and management lifecycle. During the year the business built 
out its mobile app, adding functionality and compliance 
by driving accessibility to all individuals. However, 2020 saw 
the business impacted by a steep drop in contractor usage 
across the client base due to COVID-19. Corporations and 
governments made rapid shifts to reduce or eliminate their 
temporary workforces and the business saw an increase in 
customer churn as a result but also some significant new 
client wins including Jacobs Engineering Group in the UK and 
Lenovo in the US.

Content & Services

The majority of Content & Services projects are delivered on a 
non-recurring, fixed-price basis. Through its well-tried systems 
and processes LTG constantly monitors the delivery of projects 
to ensure that they are delivered on time, to budget, and 
that they meet or exceed clients’ expectations. As a result the 
division has consistently achieved industry-leading margins.

Overview and performance

In 2020 the Content & Services division accounted for £32.2 
million or 24% of Group revenues (2019: £41.4 million; 32%). The 
organic revenue decline at constant currency of 24% was in 
line with previous guidance, gross margins remained constant 
from year-to-year, aided by LTG’s flexible operating model, and 
adjusted EBIT margins increased from 22.6% in 2019 to 24.9% 
in 2020, driven by a lower central overhead charge (allocated 
between divisions based on revenue share).

Content & Services

EBIT

Revenue

EBIT Margin

£m

40

35

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

26%

24%

22%

20%

18%

16%

14%

12%

10%

2019

2020

As anticipated, corporates postponed projects in the second 
and third quarters as they assessed the impact of COVID-19 
on their businesses. LTG also saw a reduction in new systems 
implementation fees as corporates delayed the procurement 
of enterprise software.

LEO, the Group’s innovative digital learning specialist, 
continued to deliver organisational transformation. Its world-
class consultancy and strategic learning blend design 
capabilities, supported by creative content, rich media, 
tools and platform integration are all driven by an expert 
global team on the front line of custom digital learning. LEO’s 
reputation is exemplified by its prestigious contract wins and 
industry awards which included a coveted Gold award at 
Brandon Hall 2020 for its work with Sellafield Ltd and Lane4, 
and an Investment Week Marketing and Innovation award for 
its work with Fidelity International. 

During the year Eukleia, the Group’s financial services 
subject matter expert, was merged into LEO to form LEO 
GRC (‘Governance, Risk & Compliance’). This new team 
combines Eukleia’s specialist GRC expertise with LEO’s industry 
leading production studio and related services to provide a 
compelling offering to corporates in highly-regulated markets.

Although, as predicted, LEO and LEO GRC saw a substantial 
year-on-year reduction in revenue as clients postponed 
projects, particularly in the heavily impacted travel and 
hospitality sectors, sales towards the end of 2020 accelerated 
and have continued to do so in early 2021 giving the Board 
confidence that revenues will fully recover to pre-pandemic 
levels this year. LEO is seeing significant interest from global 
corporates who are urgently looking to advance their talent 
development programs in a world of increased remote working 
and where traditional face-to-face training models are also 
being impacted by environmental sustainability concerns. 

LTG’s highly regarded games studio, PRELOADED, continued 
to support the Group’s position as a leader in immersive 
learning by innovating at the edges of Extended Reality (XR) 
and AI technologies. 

PRELOADED developed a series of corporate learning 
experiences in virtual reality including a physical therapy 
experience for a major US rehabilitation platform; enabling 
end-to-end learning in XR, and scalable ROI, connecting 
real-time data with real-world behaviours. Together with Oxford 
University, the business created Tracing Tomorrow, a game 
designed to encourage a debate around mental health 
issues, reaching over 15,000 students within four weeks of 
launch. PRELOADED also began the development of a game 
with Save The Children to improve the front-line training and 
emergency response of field managers, scheduled to launch 
later in 2021.

2020 saw significant interest in Diversity & Inclusion (‘D&I’) 
practices in the workplace as awareness increased following 
the ‘Black Lives Matter’ protests and increased regulatory and 
governance scrutiny of corporate ESG actions. Affirmity, LTG’s 
D&I affirmative action specialist solutions provider, responded 
by authoring several new e-learning modules and expanded 

its capabilities in existing diversity analytics software and 
services. Affirmity also launched a software tool for managing 
Employee Resource Groups and this is already being adopted 
by several large corporates. Diversity-related new business 
remains buoyant and we are excited by the enhanced 
opportunities presented by the acquisition of PDT Global in 
early 2021. From 2021 we will report the Affirmity and PDT 
Global businesses within the Content & Services division as the 
majority of their combined revenue is consultancy in nature; 
the allocation of reported numbers between divisions in Note 
5 is unaffected by this presentational change.

Working across a broadening range of industries, and 
supporting long-term clients during a challenging year, LTG 
has seen an increase in services and content in the area of 
innovative learning blends, social and networked learning, 
and gamified learning programmes. Our technical teams 
have continued supporting the complex technical integration 
of learning tools into more effective learning ecosystems. 
Further, new programmes from a major multi-platform and 
content roll-out for a global energy organisation, to a new 
customer learning brand for a major social networking 
provider lead some of our major projects into 2021.

Acquisitions

Open LMS 

On 31 March 2020 LTG completed the acquisition of Open 
LMS, the largest global supplier of services, hosting and 
support to the market’s leading open-source LMS, Moodle™. 

The business and assets of Open LMS were acquired from 
Blackboard Inc. for a consideration of $27.2 million (£21.9 
million), funded by the Group’s existing cash and bank 
facilities. In the year ended 31 December 2019 Open LMS 
generated unaudited revenue of c.$16 million, approximately 
70% of which were recurring subscription fees. Transaction 
costs charged to the income statement totalled £0.4 million. 

eCreators 

On 1 October 2020 LTG completed the acquisition of 
eCreators, Australia’s largest provider of services supporting 
Moodle™. Cash consideration at completion was A$6.0 million 
(c.£3.3 million) with performance payments capped at A$6.5 
million (c.£3.6 million) based on ambitious revenue growth 
targets in the three years to 2023. In the year to June 2020 
eCreators generated unaudited revenues of A$4.6 million 
(c.£2.6 million) of which approximately 70% were recurring 
subscription fees.

eThink Education 

On 4 December 2020 LTG completed the acquisition of eThink 
Education, an industry leader in the North American, Moodle™ 
LMS services market. 

The cash consideration at completion was $19.1 million 
(c.£14.4 million). Further performance payments are capped 
at $16.0 million (c.£12.0 million) based on ambitious revenue 
growth targets in the three years to 2023. eThink has delivered 
strong and consistent growth and achieved unaudited 
revenues of c.$9.5 million and c.$2.8 million of EBIT in 2020.

The three Moodle™ LMS services businesses will operate 
closely under the Open LMS brand and bring LTG global 
coverage of this growing market. On a combined basis 
the Open LMS business now generates proforma revenues 
of c.£25 million, manages more than 1,400 cloud-based 
Moodle™ clients, and services more than 8 million users 
globally. As part of our commitment to the principles of 
open-source software we will make available a range of 
our Open LMS software, for no licence fee, so that users can 
operate it in their own environments and with the hosting and 
service providers of their choice. This includes our leading 
Moodle™-based, open-source LMS, Learnbook, which we are 
rebranding as Open LMS Work.

During 2020 we also completed two bolt-on acquisitions to 
complement the Group’s software offering: Patheer and JCA. 
The former is the provider of the foundational technology 
behind PeopleFluent’s new Talent Mobility platform which is 
addressing organisations’ increasing focus on developing and 
retaining their own internal staff. The latter is complementary to 
and has been incorporated within Rustici. 

Further details on these acquisitions are provided in Note 14.

In early 2021 LTG completed three further acquisitions which 
are summarised below.

Reflektive 

On 31 January 2021 LTG completed the acquisition of 
Reflektive for an initial cash consideration of $14.2 million 
(c.£10.4 million), a leading performance management 
software provider headquartered in San Francisco. This 
highly complementary acquisition brings agile performance 
management software, expanding PeopleFluent’s capabilities 
with flagship engagement and analytics tools. Reflektive 
offers a collaborative goal-setting, continuous feedback and 
analytics platform that enables users to provide measurable 
results for boosting productivity, engagement, and retention. 
The business achieved unaudited revenues of c.$14.2 
million in 2020, of which the vast majority were derived from 
recurring annual and multi-year contracts. Although Reflektive 
generated an EBITDA loss of c.$7.0 million in 2020, LTG expects 
the acquired business to be earnings accretive in the second 
half of 2021 and aligned with typical software division margins 
by early 2022.

21  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  22

Strategic report (continued)

For the year ended 31 December 2020

PDT Global 

On 5 February 2021 LTG completed the acquisition of UK-
based PDT Global, a leading provider of D&I training solutions, 
for an initial cash consideration of £13.2 million. Further 
performance payments capped at £7.0 million are payable in 
cash, based on ambitious incremental revenue growth targets 
in the three years to 2023. PDT Global will operate alongside 
Affirmity, LTG’s existing D&I business based in Irving, Texas. The 
two businesses bring together highly complementary offerings 
which will enable clients to objectively measure and track their 
D&I performance and implement the tools, processes and 
learning required to make appropriate changes. In 2020 PDT 
Global delivered unaudited revenues of c.£4.8 million and EBIT 
of c.£2.0 million.

Bridge 

On 26 February 2021 LTG completed the acquisition of 
getBridge LLC and related assets (‘Bridge’) for a cash 
consideration of $50.0 million (c. £36.1 million). Bridge 
provides a highly user-focused learning management 
system in addition to performance, engagement and skills 
development products on a SaaS-based platform and 
represents a significant extension of LTG’s mid-enterprise 
offering for digital learning and talent management. The 
acquisition is highly complementary to PeopleFluent, which 
serves the large enterprise market, and Breezy HR, which 
serves the small and mid-sized market, and consistent with 
LTG’s strategy of providing multi-product solutions to meet 
the needs of small, mid-size and large enterprises alike. In 
2020 Bridge delivered unaudited revenues of c.$21.0 million 
and an EBIT loss of c.$1.3 million in the same period. With the 
operational synergies that will be created with the rest of the 
Group, LTG expects Bridge to become earnings accretive from 
the second half of 2021 and to align with its typical software 
division margins by early 2022. 

Group Services
The Software & Platforms and Content & Services divisions 
of the Group are supported by ‘LTG Central Services’ which 
comprises HR, IT, Finance, Legal, Facilities, Bid, Marketing and 
Hosting services. 

Each department has a centre of excellence, supported by 
additional regional resources where appropriate. The provision 
of LTG Central Services liberates the MDs of the Group’s 
businesses to pursue their sales and delivery strategies without 
needing to manage the support functions of their operations, 
and the economies of scale and expertise in the centralised 
functions ensure the consistent application of best practice, 
as well as helping to maximise cost efficiencies.

COVID-19 update
In order to sustain LTG’s position of financial strength during 
a turbulent year, in early 2020 we adopted a number of 
prudent measures including a freeze on salary increases 
and new recruits, a postponement of the proposed final 
dividend and the Directors agreed to postpone their 
2019 performance bonuses. Due to our resilient financial 
performance since then we have been able to reverse all 
of these precautionary measures including ending a salary 
deferral scheme for all staff in July and repaying furlough 
payments to the government. 

Since the outbreak of the pandemic in March 2020, we have 
followed WHO and government guidance to protect the safety 
of our workers, customers and partners. We implemented a 
work-from-home policy with effect from 16 March 2020 for 
all staff, putting in place a number of measures to enable 
effective remote working. These measures have proved to 
be highly successful and as a result we have implemented 
a ‘flexible’ working policy that will enable the vast majority of 
our staff to combine working in the office when required, with 
working from home to suit their needs.

We have undertaken regular communications with our 
employees during the year and numerous surveys and 
working groups to monitor and address concerns. It is 
gratifying to see in the survey results that LTG’s approach and 
actions have been well received by staff. I would like to thank 
the more than 1,100 staff who work for us around the world for 
their professionalism, fortitude and good humour during this 
difficult year.

Jonathan Satchell

Chief Executive

24 March 2021

Chief Financial Officer’s Review

Financial results
In the year ended 31 December 2020, the Group generated 
revenue of £132.3 million (2019: £130.1 million), an increase 
of 2%. Although like-for-like revenues on a constant currency 
basis decreased by 8%, this was more than offset by the 
contribution from acquisitions in the year. On the same like-for-
like, constant currency basis, the Software & Platforms division 
was broadly flat, while the Content & Services division fell by 
24%. In total, the Software & Platforms division accounted for 
76% of Group revenue whilst the Content & Services division 
accounted for 24% of Group revenue. Recurring revenue 
increased from 74% of Group revenue in 2019 to 81% in 2020. 
Further details on the divisional performance are provided in 
the Chief Executive’s Review. 

Resilient revenues
Revenue (£m)

130.1

132.3

CAGR
37%

51.4

93.9

2017

2018

2019

2020

Adjusted EBIT 6 was broadly flat at £40.3 million (2019: 
£41.0 million). The Group uses adjusted EBIT to provide a 
better understanding of the underlying operating business 
performance. These adjustments to Operating profit 
are set out in Note 6. Acquisition and integration costs, 
amortisation of acquired intangibles and acquisition-related 
contingent consideration and earn-outs are primarily driven 
by acquisition activity, therefore they are excluded from 
adjusted EBIT to provide a more accurate reflection of the 
underlying business performance.

Adjusted EBIT margins were 30.5% compared with 31.5% 
in 2019. These industry-leading margins and resilient 
performance in difficult market conditions reflect the strong 
cost control and flexible working practices that LTG is able  
to deploy. Management will continue to re-invest in 
incremental sales initiatives to help drive organic revenue 
growth with the aim of delivering Adjusted EBIT margins in the 
high twenties or low thirties over the medium to long term, 
balancing the returns generated by the operational leverage 
of its software businesses with investment in high-growth 
products and services.

An equity placing in May 2020 raised £81.8 million to take 
advantage of various M&A opportunities to help accelerate 
future growth. This enabled the Group to complete five 
acquisitions for a combined initial consideration of £40.6 
million. During the year these businesses contributed a 
combined £12.2 million to revenues and would have 
contributed an additional £12.2 million if they had been 
owned for the full year. Further details are provided in Note 14.

As a result of the market upheaval created by COVID-19 some 
employee LTIPs with performance criteria based on 2020 
financial targets set before the pandemic would not have 
been met. The Board has agreed that, rather than rebase the 
2020 targets, to extend the affected option agreements by 
a further year, subject to the original cap on total reward. The 
extension to the term of LTIPs does not apply to the Directors of 
LTG. As a result of this variation certain share-based payment 
charges are now amortised over a longer period and as a 
result the charge is lower in 2020 than originally anticipated 
at £3.3 million (2019: £3.1 million). The total number of 
outstanding share options at the end of 2020 was 36.1 million 
(2019: 35.3 million). Further details are provided in Note 28.

The amortisation charge for internally generated development 
costs was £4.2 million (2019: £2.4 million) as set out in Note 15. 
The Directors note that this charge was £1.9 million less (down 
£1.4 million from a £3.3 million difference in 2019) than related 
capitalised development costs of £6.1m; the difference 
primarily reflects the lag between post-acquisition capitalised 
development and the related build-up of the associated 
amortised charge over the useful economic life of the related 
asset. This difference will reduce over time, assuming a 
constant rate of spend on capitalised R&D, and excluding the 
impact of further acquisitions.

Robust margins
Adj EBIT (£m)

41.0

40.4

CAGR
47%

12.7

26.0

2017

2018

2019

2020

The following acquisition-related costs are excluded from 
Adjusted EBIT as set out in Note 6. The amortisation charge 
for acquisition-related intangible assets increased to £21.4 
million (2019: £20.9 million) due largely to the Open LMS 
acquisition early in the year. Further details are set out in Note 

6 Alternative performance measures used by the Group are defined in the Glossary on page 120.

23  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  24

Strategic report (continued)

For the year ended 31 December 2020

14. Acquisition-related contingent consideration and earn-out 
charges of £3.5 million (2019: £3.5 million) relate primarily to 
the second year of Breezy HR’s contingent earn-out agreement 
awarded based on achieving substantial incremental revenue 
growth. As noted at the time of the 2019 Results, following the 
impact of COVID-19, the earn-out period has been extended 
from three to four years, subject to the original cap on total 
contingent consideration of $18.0 million. A credit of £1.4 
million (2019: nil) reflects the movement in the fair value of the 
contingent consideration anticipated to be paid in relation to 
the Watershed acquisition for the earnout period 2019-2021. A 
net foreign exchange loss of £1.1 million (2019: nil) arose on the 
acquisition of Open LMS and reflects the movement in the USD/
GBP exchange rate between the $21.0 million revolving credit 
facility (‘RCF’) being drawn for the purposes of the acquisition 
and completion of the acquisition at the end of March 2020. 
Acquisition and integration costs amounted to £0.9 million 
(2019: £0.2 million) and related primarily to the acquisitions of 
Open LMS, eCreators and eThink. 

 Strong 3 year EPS trend
Adj dEPS (pence)

4.351

4.294

CAGR
34%

1.800

3.040

2017

2018

2019

2020

Statutory profit before tax was £13.5 million compared with 
£14.3 million in the prior year and unadjusted operating profit 
was £14.9 million compared to an unadjusted operating profit 
of £16.4 million in 2019. Statutory profit before tax is stated after 
finance charges of £1.4 million, down on 2019 (£2.1 million), 
primarily as a result of the reduction in gross borrowings.

The income tax credit of £3.9 million in 2020 (2019: £3.4 million 
charge) is stated after adjusting for the recovery of prior year 
tax losses at acquisitions in the US, the release of deferred tax 
on the amortisation of acquired intangibles and a deferred 
tax asset related to the anticipated vesting of share options. 
Further details are provided in Note 11.

Based on the average number of shares in issue, weighted 

average number of shares outstanding and adjusted operating 
profit during the year, adjusted diluted EPS decreased by 1% to 
4.294 pence (2019: 4.351 pence). On a statutory basis, basic 
EPS increased from 1.628 pence in 2019 to 2.450 pence in 
2020. Further details are provided in Note 12.

The Group has a robust balance sheet with shareholders’ 
equity at 31 December 2020 of £269.1 million, equivalent to 
36.4 pence per share (2019: shareholders’ equity of £175.5 
million, equivalent to 26.2 pence per share). The gross cash 
position at 31 December 2020 was £88.6 million (2019: £42.0 
million). The Group’s net cash at 31 December 2020 was £70.2 
million (2019: £3.8 million). Net cash is defined as gross cash 
less borrowings.

Despite the market turbulence resulting from COVID-19, 
cash collections remained strong during the year. Net cash 
generated from operating activities was £39.9 million (2019: 
£37.0 million) equivalent to an adjusted operating cash flow 
conversion rate of 85% (2019: 84%). Adjusted operating cash 
flow conversion is defined by net operating cash flows after 
adjusting for acquisition-related contingent consideration and 
earn-out payments, transaction and integration costs, interest 
and tax paid, and payments of lease liabilities as a proportion 
of adjusted EBITDA. 

Debtor days increased marginally to 87 days (2019: 81 days) 
and combined debtor, WIP and deferred income days 
reduced marginally to minus 47 days (2019: minus 57 days), 
reflecting the large proportion of Group revenues generated 
from recurring software licences where payments are received 
annually in advance. 

Net corporation tax payments were £3.4 million (2019: £4.5 
million). Cash outflows from investing activities were £45.2 
million (2019: £15.1 million) and comprised the acquisitions 
of Open LMS, eCreators, eThink, Patheer and JCA for 
£39.0 million (2019: £8.8 million) net of cash acquired, plus 
capitalised investment in internally generated IP of £6.1 million 
(2019: £5.7 million) and property, plant and equipment of £0.1 
million (2019: £0.7 million).

Cash inflows from financing activities were £53.1 million (2019: 
outflows of £6.0 million). Cash inflows from financing activities 
primarily include proceeds from the May 2020 share placing 
as well as on the exercise of employee share options totalling 
£80.6 million (2019 £0.7 million) less net loan re-payments (RCF 
movements and term loan repayments) of £18.5 million (2019: 
receipts £0.6 million), lease payments of £3.3 million (2019: 
£3.3 million) and dividend payments of £5.5 million (2019: £4.0 
million). Payments of contingent deferred consideration in 
2020 were £0.1 million (2019: £nil).

Following a review of the application of the revenue 

recognition policy to term licence contracts in the Rustici CGU 
the 2018 and 2019 balance sheets have been restated to 
recognise a proportion of the revenue on delivery rather than 
all revenue being recognised over time as had previously 
been reported. The effect of this adjustment is to bring 
forward reported revenue to earlier periods and has resulted 
in a restatement of the opening reserves, deferred income 
and tax provisions at 1 January 2019, reducing the carried 
forward deferred revenue balance by £2.1 million. There is 
no impact on the income statement for the year ended 31 
December 2019 and the underlying contractual position and 
cash generation is unaffected by this accounting adjustment. 
Further details are given in Note 4.

Key Performance Indicators
The Key Performance Indicators (‘KPIs’) are sales, profit and 
cash flow. The sales of the business are tracked through new 
wins across both divisions and retention rates and upsells in our 
Software & Platforms division. The profitability of the business, 
with its relatively low fixed-cost base, is managed primarily 
via the review of revenues in both divisions with secondary 
measures of consultant utilisation and monthly project margin 
reviews for the Content & Services division. Cash flow is 
reviewed on a Group basis aided by rolling cash flow forecasts 
and, linked to this KPI, working capital is reviewed by measures 
of debtor days and combined debtor, WIP and deferred 
income days.

Neil Elton
Chief Financial Officer

24 March 2021

25  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  26

Principal risks and uncertainties

The Directors undertake regular reviews of the risk and uncertainties facing the Group, including new and emerging risks, 
and consider the likelihood and impact on the Group of those risks in order to put in place mitigating actions. In addition 
to the financial risks discussed in Note 33, the Directors consider that the principal risks and uncertainties facing the Group 
and a summary of the key measures taken to mitigate those risks are as follows:

d
o
o
h

i
l

e
k
i
L

%
0
8
>
h
g
H

i

%
0
8
-
%
0
2
m
u
d
e
M

i

%
0
2
<
w
o
L

2

3

1

7

5

9

4

6

8

10

Low <£1m

Medium £1m-£2m

High >£2m

Financial Impact

1.  A change in macroeconomic factors which could 
lead to a decrease in trade across the group 

2.  Foreign currency risk

3.  Integrating acquisitions 

4.  Business systems and process integrity

5.  Client contractual risks

6.  Information security and cybersecurity risks

7.  Attracting and retaining talented staff 

8.  Compliance with debt finance facility 

covenants 

9.  Reputational risk

10. Legal and regulatory changes including the 
Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting 
Legislation

Trend: ,  , or 

1. A change in macroeconomic factors which could lead 
to a decrease in trade across the group
At Board, executive and finance level the Group remains apprised 
of macro-economic factors which could affect the Group, such as 
COVID-19 or Brexit. The Executive Board will decide strategically on 
how to respond. 

2. Foreign currency risk
The Group is exposed to foreign currency risk on transactions and 
balances that are denominated in currencies other than Pounds 
Sterling (primarily the United States Dollar and the Euro). Foreign 
currency risk is monitored closely to ensure that net exposure is at an 
acceptable level. The Group maintains a natural hedge whenever 
possible, by matching the cash inflows (revenue stream) and 
cash outflows used for purposes such as capital and operational 
expenditure in the respective currencies. The Group is a net generator 
of USD and has partly offset this exposure by drawing down its debt 
finance facility in USD. Further, where appropriate the Group contracts 
in USD and where there is a delay between signing and completing 
on material transactions, it may enter into short-term forward contracts 
to mitigate the foreign exchange risk. The Group does not currently 
use any foreign currency derivative hedge products.

3. Integrating acquisitions 
LTG recognises the challenge of integrating acquisitions into the 
Group, which may require merging businesses with existing operations, 
without losing key staff or customers. LTG structures purchase terms to 
incentivise and retain key staff and focuses on improved customer 
experience. Having completed eight acquisitions in the last 12 
months, LTG sets objectives for synergy realisation at the start of 
the integration process and monitors performance against these, 
including through management accounts and staff surveys.

4. Business systems and process integrity
LTG uses multiple legacy systems across its business units and we are 
currently rolling out a NetSuite ERP system across the whole business to 
improve our internal controls, help to manage acquisition integration 
and reduce risk. The speed of the Group’s growth means that there 
is a risk of ineffective use of IT systems and business processes, and 
systems being compromised through attacks, becoming out of date, 
or misuse of software terms of use. LTG operates a central IT function 
to monitor all IT systems across the Group. This function reviews the 
adequacy of our systems and identifies and tests replacement 
products, where required, as well as compliance with terms of use. 
The IT function is involved in the due diligence and integration aspects 
of all acquisitions. Business processes are kept under review. The IT 
function carries out internal and external audits which include testing 
the Group’s disaster recovery and business continuity plans.

5. Client contractual risks
The Group offers a wide variety of products and services with different 
risk profiles and in different countries, to a diverse customer base, 
many of which themselves operate in regulated sectors and/or will 
seek to contract under their own terms and conditions. The Group 
continues to expand through acquisition including the transfer 
of customer contracts from the acquired business. The Group’s 
contracting process has therefore become increasingly complex. 
LTG mitigates its client contractual risks through the operation of 
its centralised legal function which reviews all client contracts and 
maintains a delegated list of authorities who are able to enter into 
client contracts on behalf of the Group. Client contractual risks are 
assessed in acquisition due diligence and addressed as part of 
the integration workstream for acquired businesses. Contractual risk 
management processes and policies are kept under regular review.

6. Information security and cybersecurity risks
Risks related to cybercrime, malware, loss or theft of devices and 
data exposure are monitored by LTG’s IT and legal functions. There 
are a number of administrative and technical controls deployed by 
LTG’s IT team. Last year, LTG rolled out an information security training 
programme for all staff (in addition to its existing data protection 
training initiatives) for completion each year. LTG’s legal team is also 
involved in privacy compliance strategies relating to the data of the 
Group’s customers and other third parties, as well as its employees in 
the various jurisdictions in which it operates.

7. Attracting and retaining talented staff
As a people business we recognise that the future success of our 
business is dependent on attracting, developing, motivating, improving 
and retaining talent. LTG is a market leader and we will always strive 
to ensure that all our operating companies are regarded as excellent 
employers within the talent and learning industries. We benchmark 
ourselves against our peers regularly and are satisfied we offer 
competitive compensation and outstanding personal development 
opportunities that are further enhanced by LTG’s ambitious growth 
plans. We have been successful in recruiting and retaining high 
calibre staff. However, we recognise that we need to continue to 
keep our compensation and benefits packages under review and we 
have made meaningful changes in the last 12 months including an 
enhanced maternity pay policy and a move to flexible working. 

8. Compliance with debt finance facility covenants
The Group is required to comply with the covenants under its debt 
financing facility. If the covenants were breached the lender could 
take action against the Group. This could include the lender using its 
security taken over the Group’s assets to repay the outstanding debt, 
thus adversely impacting shareholders. The Group regularly monitors 
its ongoing compliance with the terms of its debt financing facility. As 
at the end of February 2021, following the most recent acquisitions, 
the net cash position of the Group was c.£25 million.

9. Reputational risk
Failings in service provision are almost certainly going to be caused by 
human error. LTG has refined its ISO 9001 management processes over 
the last two decades and constantly reviews and updates them based 
on ‘lessons learned’. Furthermore, all projects are reviewed regularly for 
performance against customer expectation, delivery milestones and 
forecast margins. Extensive work is undertaken in reviewing customer 
feedback and any complaints are reported to the Board.

10. Legal and regulatory changes including the 
Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting Legislation
The Group’s executive team and legal team identify and monitor 
legislative and regulatory changes that will impact the business. The 
executive team develops and delivers strategies to ensure ongoing 
compliance with new legislation. The Group has strategies in place to 
monitor compliance with new global data privacy legislation and the 
new carbon reporting legislation. 

In addition to the principal risks and uncertainties above, the 
Group faces other risks that include but are not limited to increased 
competition, failure to retain customer contracts, technology 
leadership and counterparty risk.

•  
 
 
27  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  28

Strategic report (continued)

For the year ended 31 December 2020

Environmental, Social and 
Governance (‘ESG’) Report

Introduction
At LTG, the Board has overall responsibility for Corporate Social 
Responsibility and Environmental, Social and Governance 
(‘ESG’). The Board has nominated Neil Elton (CFO) as the 
Board member with oversight of LTG’s ESG initiatives.

LTG has established an ESG Committee which replaces the 
former CSR Committee and meets regularly to oversee and 
coordinate initiatives and implement the recommendations 
of the Board. The ESG Committee comprises the Group’s 
CFO, Chief Operating Officer, Chief People Officer and Head 
of Legal. The Committee communicates best practice and 
achievements across the Group through the implementation 
of policies and training and regular staff communications 
including a dedicated intranet portal.

LTG’s ESG initiatives can be summarised in five key areas:

1.  Supporting clients make a positive ESG impact

2.  Environmental sustainability

3.  Taking care of our people

4.  Meeting the expectations of stakeholders

5.  Achieving high standards of data privacy and security 

For 2020 the Group disclosed energy and carbon footprint 
information for the first time under new Streamlined Energy 
and Carbon Reporting (SECR) regulations which came into 
effect on 1 April 2019. We also seek to apply best practice 
by acknowledging TCFD (Task Force on Climate-related 
Financial Disclosures) recommended disclosures and the 
SASB’s (Sustainability Accounting Standards Board) accounting 
standard for the Software & IT services sector. LTG also 
seeks to work to the Ten Principles of the United Nations 
Global Compact (‘UNGC’) which encompass principles 
regarding human and labour rights, anti-corruption and the 
environment. 

These values and principles are followed in all locations 
where LTG carries out business. Appropriate Group initiatives 
are combined with enabling and championing local 
initiatives that support and celebrate the contribution that LTG 
employees make to projects in their communities.

Supporting clients make a positive ESG 
impact
In addition to our efforts to ensure that LTG acts as a 
good corporate citizen, we are empowering our clients to 
achieve their own ESG priorities. At the core of LTG’s talent 
development offering is the beneficial development of 
people whether that be through learning and training 
initiatives, talent management insights or affirmative action 
plans regarding diversity and inclusion (D&I) in the workplace.

LTG assisted over 200 million people globally last year 
whether that be the circa 53 million employees of our various 
corporate and government clients using our learning and 
talent management software and content solutions or our 
D&I services, or the circa 167 million learners whose learning 
journeys were enabled with Rustici’s interoperability software 
as they accessed their training on more than 70% of the 
world’s Learning Management Systems.

LTG is enabling the shift from carbon intensive face-to-face 
training to digital learning, reducing the need to travel by 
providing learning systems to 10.6 million people in 44 
countries. 

Increasingly LTG is producing content that enables our clients 
to powerfully communicate ESG priorities and help effect 
change in their workforces, their extended enterprise and 
society as a whole. Examples include helping over 1,100 
companies achieve workforce equity through solutions that 
optimise Affirmative Action and D&I programmes; providing 
specific ESG learning content for 3 million people globally; 
making people safer with courses on Health & Safety, Cyber 
& Data Security, Tackling Modern Day Slavery and Anti-
Harassment; and supporting compliance needs through 
topics such as Personal Ethics, Whistleblowing, Anti-Bribery, 
and Consumer Protection. LTG also uses data to make digital 
learning more efficient and save waste.

Environmental sustainability
LTG’s environmental policy is to ensure that we understand 
and effectively manage the actual and potential 
environmental impact of our activities. The Group’s operations 
comply with legal requirements relating to the environment 
in areas where the Group conducts its business. During the 
period covered by this report LTG has not breached any 
environmental regulations.

During 2020 the Group achieved the first phase of its 
sustainability plans by setting up a combined health, safety 
and environmental management system (HSEMS). This allows 
the Group to collect and track data and analyse trends whilst 
ensuring that our office facilities achieve a desired level of 
sustainable practices. The Group can now collect, monitor 
and report on a number of data points including energy 
usage and emissions, type and frequency of accidents and 
incidents, and compliance with HSE legislation. A series of 
standard operating procedures covers everything from risk 
assessments to legionella tests, with the whole management 
system monitored by a programme of internal audits. The 
second phase of implementation will see the embedding of 
sustainable practices into everyday activities with the setting 
of long-term goals as appropriate.

Energy usage and carbon footprint 

Our climate-related financial disclosures seek to follow TCFD 
recommendations. We manage and minimise our impact 
on the environment through good corporate governance, 
measuring and monitoring climate-related risks and 
opportunities and then managing identified risks. We then  
use metrics and targets to maximise the effectiveness of  
this strategy.

In 2020 we report for the first time under the SECR framework. 
We go beyond mandated disclosure to report on total Group 
emissions and to include Scope 3 GHG (greenhouse gas) 
emissions in addition to Scopes 1 and 2. 

Scope 1 comprises emissions from the direct burning of fossil 
fuels; this was nil.

Scope 2 emissions are generated from the indirect 
generation of purchased energy. In the case of LTG this is 
largely related to the purchase of electricity across our office 
estate. The total quantity of Scope 2 energy consumed 
globally in 2020 is estimated to be 1.6 million kWhs (2019: 2.0 
million kWhs).

Scope 3 emissions are all other indirect emissions that occur 
in the value chain, both upstream and downstream. LTG 
has identified the major contributors for the Group as being 
employee commuting, business travel and data centre 
usage on behalf of clients. 

In the case of Scope 2 we source the data on an office-by-
office basis by consulting with our utility providers, or where we 
occupy offices in buildings with shared services by estimating 
our proportionate share of the estimated building emissions 
(often with reference to the service charge).

In the case of Scope 3 we use a variety of methodologies 
including surveys of staff regarding their usual mode of 
transport to work or through an analysis of long-haul and 
short-haul flights to which we then apply estimated carbon 
emissions. Information on data centre emissions is primarily 
sourced direct from the outsourced data centre providers. 

LTG’s total group-wide Scope 2 and 3 tons CO2e (tons carbon 
dioxide equivalent) emissions are set out in the table below. 
We also calculate tCO2e per £million of Group revenue. 
Emissions reduced 42% from 2,343 tCO2e in 2019 to 1,356 
tCO2e in 2020 despite the increased size of the Group and 
largely due to the impact of closing our office estate from 
16 March 2020, and banning all but essential business travel. 
tCO2e per £million revenue reduced 43% from 18.0 to 10.3.

Management will continue to monitor the amount and mix 
of GHG emissions particularly as the business environment 
normalises over the next year where we expect Scope 2 and 
3 emissions to increase primarily as a result of the increased 
size of the Group and a return to our offices by staff. LTG 
has taken a number of initiatives, some of which are set out 
below, to reduce the Scope 2 and 3 carbon footprint of the 
Group. Management will continue to review opportunities to 
reduce emissions further and whether to set specific science 
based targets in the near term. 

Total Group tons CO2 emissions 2019 and 2020 by Scope and per £m revenues

Scope 2

Scope 3

Total tCO2e

tCO2e

1,365

978

2,343

2019

2020

tCO2e/£m revs.

tCO2e

tCO2e/£m revs.

10.5

7.5

18.0

1,096

260

1,356

8.3

2.0

10.3

29  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  30

Strategic report (continued)

For the year ended 31 December 2020

Office facilities

LTG is a highly acquisitive business, and an important part of 
its integration programme is to rationalise the growing network 
of office locations and where appropriate accommodate 
remote working practices and centralisation of practices 
around ‘core’ office hubs. All staff are able to work seamlessly 
from any LTG office. This brings flexibility for our staff, facilitates 
conscious travel decisions, helps to foster our ‘one Group’ 
spirit, and is highly beneficial to the efficiency of intra- 
Group projects. 

LTG makes recycling facilities available in all office locations 
whilst office managers are encouraged to take advantage 
of local opportunities. In Brighton, a local recycling company 
provides online reports on the types and amounts of waste 
collected, whilst the Franklin, Tennessee office worked with 
a local recycling company which helped individuals with 
intellectual and developmental disabilities to progress toward 
their full potential.

Working closely with the Facilities team in Central Services, 
LTG’s QHSE department audits all Group office locations for 
compliance with HSE requirements. Monitored requirements 
include the eradication of all single-use plastics, provision 
and use of different recycling facilities and the display of 
promotional and educational HSE material. 

Data centres

LTG operates a number of software platforms for clients 
across its learning and talent management businesses. 
These platforms are hosted in data centres which are heavy 
users of electricity. Over the last three years the Group has 
undertaken a program of rationalising its data centre estate 
and where appropriate has closed down its own-hosted 
servers and transferred these to outsourced providers, where 
they benefit from economies of scale and greater flexibility 
of deployment. LTG operates rigorous review processes in 
order to ensure that the business is able to minimise excess 
capacity. We note that our main supplier of data centre 
capacity has a stated target of using 100% renewable 
energy by 2025 and plans to be net-zero carbon by 2040, a 
decade before the Paris Agreement target.

Travel

Regular interactions and communications are encouraged 
between staff, clients, suppliers and other stakeholders and in 
the majority of instances this is achieved through email, video 
conferencing, telephone, VOIP and instant messaging. Where 
appropriate however, staff will travel to meet stakeholders. 
The Group has in place a process for the pre-approval by line 
managers of any travel and as a result of introducing these 
practices it has dramatically reduced the number of flights 

taken. Data is collated for the HSEMS and from this we are 
able to calculate distance travelled  
and emissions.

The majority of LTG’s staff outside of North America use public 
transport to travel to and from the workplace and in most 
locations LTG offers only bicycle spaces for staff. The Group 
offers season ticket travel loans. Where the availability of 
public transport is limited we encourage staff to car share. 
LTG does not make company cars available to its staff or offer 
a car allowance as part of our employee benefits package.

The QHSE Team put out annual staff commute surveys to help 
understand our impact on the local environment. This data 
breaks down the different methods of transport and distance/
duration of journeys, which in turn allows us to calculate 
emissions. This data also allows us to help individuals who 
have excessive or difficult commutes and reach more flexible 
and beneficial working arrangements.

With effect from 2020 LTG has introduced a new ‘flexible’ 
working policy that allows staff who are not required to work 
from the office the flexibility to work from either the office 
or their home as they choose to suit their requirements. It 
is therefore anticipated that GHG emissions per FTE from 
commuting will not return to pre COVID-19 levels.

Secure recycling practices

Recycling of business equipment is the responsibility of 
our Central Services IT team, with QHSE able to advise on 
the potential impact of ISO/IEC 27001:2013 relating to the 
disposal of equipment. Not all IT equipment goes to recycling 
in line with the WEEE directive. In 2020 the IT Team worked  
with Socialbox.biz to donate old IT equipment to charities for 
the homeless.

Social - Taking care of our people 
The qualities, skills and commitment of our staff play a major 
role in the business success of the Group. Taking care of our 
people is one of our highest priorities and this was reflected 
in our appointment of a Chief People Officer (CPO) towards 
the end of 2019. During 2020 the Group introduced a range 
of new policies, procedures and practices designed to make 
LTG a leading employer that cares for its employees and 
provides the optimum environment for them to flourish.

Measuring the well-being and belonging of our people

We measure the well-being and belonging of our people, 
and track the impact of our initiatives, so we know where 
to make improvements. The Group embarked on a 
benchmarking exercise in the second half of 2020 and the 
Group will continue to monitor trends over time. 

Voluntary staff turnover reduced from 19.7% in 2019 to 11.3% 
in 2020. Voluntary staff turnover is where staff choose to leave 
rather than, for example, as part of a planned corporate 
restructuring. Voluntary staff turnover can be higher than 
usual following a business combination as some employees 
choose the moment of change to look for new opportunities. 
We believe that this reduction was largely due to the impact 
of COVID-19 on job security and as market conditions 
normalise we expect the voluntary staff turnover rate to 
increase in 2021.

A valuable source of regular staff feedback comes from our 
quarterly Pulse Surveys. This survey has become a significant 
tool for measuring our performance as employers and as 
many of the questions remain constant it enables us to track 
trends. We also have a six-monthly D&I survey which provides 
another valuable source of employee feedback. Further 
details are provided on the LTG website.

LTG has conducted a number of focus groups, in part 
targeted by the results of the Pulse survey results, to better 
understand how we could improve aspects of our business. 
Three main priorities were identified in 2020: professional 
development; well-being; and recognition and feedback.

Stress and mental health

LTG recognises that providing support for wellness at work is 
an essential component of caring for our people. In 2020 
we launched a number of initiatives to support this. These 
included the launch of a confidential stress email hotline to 
allow the business an early opportunity to lend support in 
cases where employees are suffering from stress. We have 
developed a mental health first aid initiative with volunteer 
training set for the first half of 2021. And there is a dedicated 
page on our intranet for Wellness @ Work Plans - where 
employees and managers can find resources and request 
additional support on how to manage mental health issues. 
2020 also saw the Launch of LTG’s Wellbeing Hub for news, 
training and resources. In addition, we offer Employee 
Assistance Programmes providing staff with support in a range 
of areas, including well-being support, financial advice and 
legal advice through confidential helplines.

Recognition and feedback

As part of our initiative to provide recognition and feedback 
LTG operates an annual appraisal process managed 
through our own talent management solutions. We have 
also developed a number of initiatives including team 
social budgets, long-term service awards and regular staff 
‘shout-outs’. We aim to communicate with all employees at 
a global level. In 2020 we increased our communication 
through regular live business updates from our CEO. These 

have received strong positive feedback in our Pulse Surveys, 
especially during the early stages of COVID-19. We aim 
to maintain regular communications and keep everyone 
informed of current business activities, changes in practices 
and procedures, and business performance. 

Incentives

Employees’ performance is aligned to the Group’s goals 
through an annual performance review process and via 
LTG’s incentive programmes. All LTG staff are eligible for a 
commission or annual performance bonus scheme linked 
with achieving LTG’s strategic objectives.

In 2020 an additional “Sprint” bonus was launched for all 
performance bonus scheme employees. This bonus was 
designed to reward staff who, because of the impact of 
COVID-19, did not meet their original performance based 
targets but through exceptional performance could receive a 
reduced award for achieving or exceeding their revised post 
COVID-19 plans. 

The Group has offered an annual Sharesave scheme in the 
UK since 2014 to allow employees to participate in LTG’s 
equity story. In 2019 LTG launched a similar scheme in the US 
and Canada and with the territorial expansion of the Group in 
2020 has launched new schemes in Australia and Colombia. 
The Group also operates a share option scheme for senior 
managers that rewards the achievement of demanding 
performance targets. Options typically vest over a period of 
four years. 

LTG has launched a number of other awards in recognition of 
outstanding achievements in product and service innovation, 
cross-selling initiatives and through successful hiring 
recommendations.

Training and Talent Management

We continue to invest in training and developing our staff 
through internally-arranged knowledge-sharing events, 
external courses, and an internal staff portal. We have a 
dedicated team that develops bespoke learning programs 
for staff, leveraging off the Group’s own expertise and 
learning solutions. 

LTG uses its own PeopleFluent Aspire Talent Management 
platform. In 2021 we will continue to use this platform  
and its data will drive our annual appraisal process, merit 
review process, succession planning and Leadership 
Development Program. 

We have increased the overall training budget for 2021 in 
anticipation of providing more opportunities for company-
wide learning initiatives. These include increased access to: 
a) learning resources to support professional development; 

31  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  32

Strategic report (continued)

For the year ended 31 December 2020

b) extensive content libraries to help with self-paced 
development; and c) a structured course delivered by the 
Learning & Development team as well as additional online 
learning licenses, 360 degree feedback and access to a 
professional coach, via the launch of our LTG Leadership 
development programme in 2021.

LTG has also made a commitment to increasing the amount 
of time available for training and development opportunities. 

Health and Safety

LTG endeavours to ensure that the working environment is 
safe and conducive to healthy, safe and content employees 
who are able to balance work and family commitments. 
The Group has a Health and Safety at Work policy which is 
reviewed regularly by the Board and established a Group-
wide QHSE department in 2019, responsible for implementing 
health and safety and environmental policy, and monitoring 
our environmental and health and safety efforts. The Board 
Executive Director responsible for health and safety is the 
Chief Executive. 

We believe that a more proactive, innovative and wide-
ranging approach to health & safety has distinct benefits. 
It is seen by employees as a way to build trust and improve 
productivity and efficiency, which in turn increases staff 
engagement, boosts staff retention and helps employees 
to stay happy, healthy and productive. With the onset of the 
COVID-19 pandemic LTG closed all of its offices with effect 
from 16 March 2020 and has supported staff working at home.

The QHSE team coordinates day-to-day activities across the 
Group and draws on the expertise of other departments, 
including Legal, HR and Facilities. As well as ensuring that 
we comply with the relevant health and safety legislation, 
as part of the internal audit process, the QHSE team takes 
a proactive approach to health and safety management 
including integrating new acquisitions. Through the QHSE 
service desk and intranet site, staff around the globe can 
report HSE accidents, incidents and near misses, request 
a risk assessment, undertake health and safety training, or 
simply find out what material goes into which recycling bin.

Diversity and inclusion (‘D&I’)

LTG believes that the diversity of our workforce is a key point 
of strength, making the Group a more vibrant and dynamic 
place to work and hence, more successful as a business. 
We welcome all employees and aim to avoid any form of 
discrimination. Our Group businesses Affirmity and PDT are D&I 
experts and we use their expertise and experience internally 
for our own employees as well as for our clients.

We take great care to ensure that our employment policies 
are non-discriminatory and that all appointments and 
promotions are made solely on the basis of merit. We 
believe that all our people have a fundamental right to 
respect and dignity in the workplace and do not tolerate 
harassment or discrimination in any form, whether intentional 
or unintentional. 

During 2020 LTG launched a new D&I strategy for its 
employees with three main principles. First, we want our 
employees to bring their whole selves to work at LTG; people 
who feel safe, heard and valued will return those efforts in 
kind. Second, we want the best people to work, and feel that 
they can flourish and succeed here, irrespective of their age, 
disability, gender identity, race, religion or belief, sex, sexual 
orientation, marriage and civil partnership status, pregnancy 
and maternity needs, or veteran status. Third, the hardest 
problems we work on, the ones that drive our real value in 
the market, require varied perspectives and experiences; 
we strive to maximise these by having people with different 
strengths and life experiences working for LTG.

Affirmity undertook a detailed review of the diversity of 
the business, the results of which can be found on the LTG 
website. The review revealed that although LTG started from 
a good position, areas of focus are the underrepresentation 
of women in Executive-level roles and Blacks and Hispanics in 
senior roles.

Initiatives to support these principles in 2020 included the 
introduction of ‘Blind Recruitment’ by removing names from 
CVs; measuring candidate diversity for all roles; programmes 
of continuous improvement for under-represented groups; 
management training in diversity recruitment; advertising 
all roles on our internal job board; changes to internal hiring 
and promotion to improve fairness; and equality, diversity 
and inclusion compliance training (including unconscious 
bias) for all. A number of Employee Resource Groups (‘ERGs’) 
were also set up to address issues as diverse as disability, the 
family, LGTBQ+, gender diversity and veterans.

The best things we can do as an organisation are mutually 
beneficial, to us, to our clients, and to our people. Our 
D&I policies are designed to ensure that our approach 
to business is to the benefit of all stakeholders. Initiatives 
planned for 2021 include establishing a graduate scheme 
that aims to recruit a diverse group of future leaders and to 
advertise senior roles on diversity-focused job boards.

Governance - Meeting the expectations 
of stakeholders

Meeting the expectations of stakeholders 

We recognise the importance of trust in meeting or 
exceeding the expectations of our customers, employees, 
investors and other stakeholders. Our compliance with all 
applicable laws and regulations is of paramount importance, 
not just to ourselves, but also to our partner organisations, 
clients, and all other stakeholders. Non-compliance with 
applicable laws in the value-chain can lead to severe losses 
due to reputational damage or fines. Our clients are looking 
for suppliers that take the highest levels of ethics and business 
conduct into account, to give them assurance of their 
compliance with all relevant laws and regulations and the 
measures that they have implemented to warrant this.

In order to live up to these standards, and to be seen as 
an organisation that other organisations would like to be 
associated with, LTG implemented the following measures 
with which we expect all of our employees, directors and 
contractors to comply:

Business ethics

Our Code of Business Conduct now includes a business 
ethics training programme for all permanent employees. As 
part of LTG’s compliance obligations, LTG’s Legal department, 
HR department and Senior Management Team have 
established a company-wide policy framework, supported by 
a knowledge centre on the Group’s intranet. We have specific 
staff policies on five areas: a) anti-corruption, anti-bribery, 
anti-slavery and business ethics; b) Health & Safety; c) Data 
Protection; d) Information Security; e) Whistleblowing.

In 2021 we will pass oversight for ethical issues to the ESG 
Committee which has 50% Board-level representation. 
Responsibilities will include a commitment to regular reviews 
and audit (once every three years) of anti-corruption, anti-
bribery, anti-slavery and business ethics policies as well as 
reviewing our ethical standards more generally. We are also 
introducing a formal anonymous whistleblower system with 
legal protection and all suppliers will be required to have anti-
corruption policies and programmes in place. Consideration 
is also being given to updating policies relating to anti-money 
laundering and fraud.

Federal Contractor Status

Where businesses contract with federal agencies in the US 
they may be determined to be ‘Federal Contractors’. This 
status brings with it specific governance requirements. Where 
our US business has federal contractor status, we comply with 
these additional obligations which include ensuring that our 
recruitment practices support the hiring of a diverse workforce.

ISO certifications and audit

Our QHSE Team is highly experienced in ISO certifications and 
is able to offer audit services across the Group as required. 
These services are particularly useful for Group companies 
holding or seeking to obtain ISO/IEC 27001:2013 and following 
GxP manufacturing practices. The QHSE team is also able 
to share best practice across the Group and provide project 
management and consultancy services across a range of 
other ISO certifications.

Following Rustici’s recent successful ISO/IEC 27001:2013 
accreditation and PeopleFluent’s continued accreditation, 
we have three more Group businesses aiming for certification 
in 2021: Open LMS, Watershed, and Breezy HR. Work is already 
underway with our preferred partner to achieve this.

Our LEO business holds ISO 9001:2015, the international 
standard for quality management systems. This is managed 
by the QHSE Team which carries out a comprehensive 
internal audit programme covering projects and bids as well 
as the management system itself. Process non-compliance 
and product quality deficiencies are jointly investigated by 
the QHSE team and LEO’s Content Quality Manager using 
mature CAPA (corrective and preventative actions) and RCA 
(root cause analysis) procedures.

A monthly quality management report to the Senior 
Management Team contains details of ongoing continuous 
improvement projects, process non-conformances, internal 
and external audit results, Net Promoter Scores and client 
feedback, in line with the management review requirements 
of ISO 9001:2015.

Investing in our communities 

LTG undertakes a number of local charitable initiatives each 
year, with the Group often matching contributions raised by 
staff. In 2020, charitable initiatives included raising funds for 
Save the Children, Rainbow Trust, Alzheimer’s Society, Sheffield 
Children’s Hospital, MIND, Macmillan Cancer Support, Refuge, 
RNLI and Kidney Research.

LTG continued to sponsor Learn Appeal, a charity providing 
learning to disadvantaged communities in the UK and  
sub-Saharan Africa as well as providing them with systems 
that enable access to learning content through early 
generation smartphones without the need for a costly  
mobile internet connection. 

During 2020 the Group made charitable contributions 
totalling £82,500 (2019: £25,000).

33  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  34

Strategic report (continued)

For the year ended 31 December 2020

Continuous improvement of data privacy 
and security standards
LTG complies with applicable data protection laws in the 
collection and use of personal data of employees as well as 
customers, prospects, partners, vendors and other third parties.

Section 172(1) Statement 
The Directors of the Group must act in accordance with a set 
of general duties. These duties are detailed in section 172(1) 
of the UK Companies Act 2006, which is summarised as 
follows:

Centralised security protocols are kept under review by LTG’s IT 
team with input from the legal team and QHSE.

LTG carries out a data privacy risk assessment as part of 
the due diligence process for all acquisitions. This includes 
checking responses to questions that are raised with the 
vendor covering data protection compliance and regulatory 
action; verification of any registrations and certifications held 
by the target business; a review of external facing and internal 
privacy policies and notices; an assessment of third-party risk 
arising from the target’s use of data processors; and a review 
of key contractual commitments related to data protection 
and security. 

All newly-acquired businesses are included in LTG’s cyber 
insurance coverage. The adequacy of the scope and 
limits of cover are assessed annually as part of LTG’s Group 
insurance renewal.

LTG has given greater prominence to cyber risk in its corporate 
risk register at a Group and business unit level in recognition 
of the rapid growth of the Group through acquisition over the 
last 12 months and the corresponding increase in personal 
data that is being handled by LTG as a data controller and 
also on behalf of its clients.

The Software-as-a-Service (‘SaaS’) and hosted solutions 
provided by LTG to clients globally mean that effective  
data privacy and security processes are essential for LTG’s 
service offering.

LTG has increased headcount in both its legal and security 
teams in order to provide best-in-class support for its data 
privacy and security compliance. LTG’s legal team is also 
carrying out a privacy compliance audit of each of its 
business units that will include new privacy and security 
legislation that is applicable to the Group’s activities.

LTG maintains its Privacy Shield certification for its in-scope 
subsidiaries and has put in place alternative means of 
ensuring lawful personal data transfers.

A Director of a Company must act in the way they consider, 
in good faith, would be most likely to promote the success of 
the Company for the benefit of its members as a whole, and 
in doing so have regard (amongst other matters) to:

a. The likely consequences of any decision in the long term

b. The interests of the Company’s employees

c. The need to foster the Company’s business relationships 

with suppliers, customers and others

d. The impact of the Company’s operations on the 

community and the environment

e. The desirability of the Company maintaining a reputation 

for high standards of business conduct

f.  The need to act fairly as between members of  

the Company.

The Directors of Learning Technologies Group plc consider 
that they have fulfilled their duties in accordance with 
section 172(1) of the UK Companies Act 2006 and have 
acted in a way which is most likely to promote the success 
of the Group for the benefit of its stakeholders as a whole in 
the following ways:

Shareholders

The directors seek to build on a mutual understanding of 
objectives between LTG and its shareholders by meeting 
to discuss long-term issues and receive feedback, 
communicating regularly throughout the year. For further 
details see the Corporate Governance Report.

Employees

LTG is dependent upon the qualities and skills of its 
employees, and the commitment of its staff plays a major 
role in the Group’s business success. For further details on 
how the Group is managing and developing the talent of 
its people, as well as communicating decisions within the 
Group, see the “Social - Taking care of our people” section in 
the ESG Report.

Customers and Suppliers

LTG has well-defined ISO 9001 management processes 
and all projects are reviewed regularly for performance 
against customer expectations. Extensive work is undertaken 
in reviewing customer feedback and any complaints are 
reported to the Board. For further information on how LTG 
fosters business relationships with customers, suppliers 
and others, please refer to “Governance - Meeting the 
expectations of stakeholders’’ section in the ESG report. 

LTG services customers around the world, and encourages 
regular interactions and communications between its 
staff, its clients, suppliers and other stakeholders and in the 
majority of instances this is achieved through a variety of 
communication media made available to all staff including 
email, video conferencing, phone and social media.

Community and Environment

At LTG, the Board has overall responsibility for ESG and CSR with 
development and initiatives being led by the Chief Executive. 
LTG has established a CSR Committee which meets regularly 
to oversee and coordinate initiatives and implement the 
recommendations of the Board. In 2021 the CSR Committee 
will be superseded by the ESG Committee. Members will 
include two Board representatives, the CFO and Head of 
Legal, plus the Group’s COO and Chief People Officer.

As was the practice of the CSR Committee, the 
ESG Committee will communicate best practice 
and achievements across the Group through the 
implementation of policies and training and regular staff 
communications including a dedicated intranet portal. It 
will also take responsibility for the group-wide environmental 
management system which is helping to monitor progress 
against our ESG goals.

LTG also undertakes a number of local charitable initiatives 
each year, with the Group often matching contributions 
raised by staff. For further details on LTG’s community and 
environmental interactions, see the “Governance - Meeting 
the expectations of stakeholders’’ section in the ESG report. 

Decision-making, Risk Management and Governance and 
Performance Oversight

The Board met 13 times during the year. There were also three 
Audit & Risk Committee meetings and four Remuneration 
Committee meetings. Please see the Corporate Governance 
Report for further details. The Board meetings are structured 
so that the Board can make an educated and informed 
decision, with a monthly board pack including financial 
results both at a consolidated Group level and individual 
business unit level circulated a few days prior to each Board 
meeting. This board pack also contains commentary on key 
events from the COO and each of the Managing Directors, 
giving the Board a rounded view of the entire Group, both 
financial and otherwise.

During the year we completed the acquisition and integration 
of Open LMS, eCreators, eThink, JCA and Patheer. These 
acquisitions were deemed by the Board to be beneficial for 
shareholders and customers alike as they add strength and 
breadth to our multi-solution offering as well as enabling us to 
support a broader customer base. For further details on these 
acquisitions see the Chief Executive’s Review.

Culture and Values

LTG promotes a culture of honesty, integrity, trust and respect 
and all members of staff are expected to operate in an 
ethical manner, in all their dealings, whether internal or 
external. We do not tolerate behaviour which goes against 
this or which could result in reputational damage to the 
business. To achieve this LTG has in place a number of 
policies and corporate training as outlined in “Governance - 
Meeting the expectations of stakeholders’’ in the ESG report.

The Strategic Report for the year ended 31 December 2020 
has been signed on behalf of the Board of Directors by:

Jonathan Satchell
Chief Executive

24 March 2021

 
35  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  36

Corporate Governance Report

Introduction from the Chairman
As a Board, we believe that practising good Corporate 
Governance is essential for building a successful and 
sustainable business in the long-term interests of all LTG 
stakeholders. LTG’s shares are listed on the Alternative 
Investment Market (‘AIM’) of the London Stock Exchange.

With effect from September 2018 LTG has adopted the QCA 
Corporate Governance Code. The Company has adopted 
a share dealing code for the Board and employees of the 
Company which is in conformity with the requirements of 
Rule 21 of the AIM Rules for Companies. The Company takes 
steps to ensure compliance by the Board and applicable 
employees with the terms of this code.

The following pages outline the structures, processes and 
procedures by which the Board ensures that high standards of 
corporate governance are maintained throughout the Group. 
Further details can be found on the LTG website at www.ltgplc.
com/investor-information/corporate-governance/.

Promoting long-term value for shareholders 

LTG’s strategy and business model is to build a dynamic 
portfolio of complementary, integrated businesses and 
create an international full-service digital learning and talent 
management business of scale, through a combination of 
organic growth and strategic acquisitions that complement 
the existing business. Further details are provided in the Chief 
Executive’s Review. 

Board of Directors
The Directors of the Company who served during the year were: 

Relations with shareholders

The Directors seek to build on a mutual understanding of 
objectives between LTG and its shareholders by meeting 
to discuss long-term issues and receive feedback, 
communicating regularly throughout the year.

The primary means of shareholder communications are 
through our Annual Report and Accounts and Interim Report, 
trading updates and Capital Market Days. The Chief Executive 
and Chief Financial Officer hold regular meetings throughout 
the year with investors and the Board communicates with 
private investors through the Annual General Meeting and 
through our investor email at investorenquiries@ltgplc.com.

Promoting corporate culture based on ethical values and 
behaviour 

The Board recognises that its prime responsibility is to promote 
the success of the Group for the benefit of its members as 
a whole. The Board understands that it has a responsibility 
towards all stakeholders including employees, partners, 
customers and suppliers. The Group has a strong ethical 
culture, always challenging itself to improve and always 
seeking to meet or exceed the expectations of stakeholders. 
Further details of some of the Group’s initiatives are included 
in the ESG Report under “Governance - Meeting the 
expectations of stakeholders’’.

Director

Role at 31 
December 2020

Date of  
(re-) appointment

Board Committee

Andrew Brode

Non-executive Chairman

Leslie-Ann Reed

Non-executive Director

Aimie Chapple

Non-executive Director

Simon Boddie

Non-executive Director

Jonathan Satchell

Chief Executive

Neil Elton

Piers Lea

Chief Financial Officer

Chief Strategy Officer

Board Committee abbreviations are as follows:  
A = Audit Committee; R = Remuneration Committee

A

A

A

R

R

R

19/06/2020

19/06/2020

19/06/2020

01/10/2020

19/06/2020

19/06/2020

19/06/2020

Board of Directors

Andrew Brode
Non-executive Chairman

Andrew Brode is a Chartered 
Accountant and a former chief 
executive of Wolters Kluwer 
(UK) plc. In 1990, he led the 
management buy-out of the 
Eclipse Group, which was sold to 
Reed Elsevier in 2000. In 1995, 
he led the management buy-in, 
and is Executive Chairman of 
RWS Group plc, the world’s largest 
technical translations group, listed 
in the Top 10 of AIM companies. 

Andrew is also Non-executive 
Chairman of AIM quoted GRC 
International Group.  He acquired 
Epic Group Limited (‘Epic’) together 
with Jonathan Satchell in 2008

Leslie-Ann Reed
Independent Non-
executive Director / Audit 
& Risk Committee Chair / 
Remuneration Committee

Leslie-Ann Reed is a Chartered 
Accountant and was formerly 
CFO of the online auctioneer 
Go Industry plc. Prior to this, she 
served as CFO of the B2B media 
group Metal Bulletin plc, and as 
an adviser to Marwyn Investment 
Management. After a career at 
Arthur Andersen, she held senior 
finance roles both in the UK 
and internationally at Universal 
Pictures, Polygram Music, Warner 
Communications Inc. and EMI 
Music. Her current Non-executive 
Directorships include Bloomsbury 
Publishing plc; Induction 
Healthcare Group plc and Centaur 
Media plc for which she also serves 
as Chair of the Audit Committee.

Aimie Chapple 
Independent Non-executive 
Director / Remuneration 
Committee Chair / Audit & Risk 
Committee

Aimie Chapple was a Senior 
Partner at Accenture, working with 
clients in the UK, US and around 
the world for over 25 years. In 
2019, Aimie was appointed 
Divisional Chief Executive Officer 
Capita Customer Management 
with teams in the UK, Germany, 
Switzerland, Ireland, Poland, 
India and South Africa. She also 
continues to be active in the 
wellness area, and works as a 
coach with a number of tech and 
wellness entrepreneurs and start-
up organisations.

Simon Boddie 
Independent Non-executive 
Director

Simon Boddie was appointed to 
the Board on 1 October 2020. He is 
currently Chief Financial Officer at 
Coats Group plc, the world’s leading 
industrial thread manufacturer and 
FTSE 250 member, a position he 
has held since 2016. Previous roles 
include 10 years as Group Finance 
Director of Electrocomponents plc, 
a FTSE 250 global multi-channel 
provider of industrial and electronic 
products and solutions, and 13 years 
in senior finance roles at Diageo 
plc. In addition to his roles at LTG 
and Coats, Simon serves as a Non-
Executive Director and Chairman of 
the Audit Committee for PageGroup 
plc, a FTSE 250-listed international 
professional recruitment company.

Jonathan Satchell
Chief Executive

Jonathan Satchell has worked in 
the training industry since 1992. In 
1997 he acquired EBC, which he 
transformed from a training video 
provider to a bespoke e-learning 
company. The company was sold to 
Futuremedia in 2006. He became 
interim MD of Epic in 2007 and 
the following year he acquired the 
Company with Andrew Brode. He 
oversaw the transformation of Epic 
from a custom content e-learning 
company to the global, fast-
growing, full-service digital learning 
and talent management company 
that LTG has become.

Neil Elton
Chief Financial Officer

Piers Lea 
Chief Strategy Officer

Claire Walsh 
Company Secretary

Neil Elton is a Chartered Accountant 
and was appointed as Chief 
Financial Officer of LTG in November 
2014. An experienced Finance 
Director, he has helped successfully 
build a number of fast-growing 
listed companies. He joined from 
Science Group plc, a Cambridge-
based technology research and 
development company, where he 
was Finance Director from 2010 to 
2014. Before that he was Finance 
Director at Concateno plc, the 
European leader in drugs-of-abuse 
testing (2007-2010) and Mecom 
Group plc, the European media 
group (2005-2007).

Piers Lea founded LINE 
Communications Holdings Limited in 
1989. LINE was acquired by LTG  
in April 2014. Piers has over 30 years’ 
experience in distance learning 
and communications and is widely 
considered a thought leader in the 
field of e-learning. He sits on the 
advisory board of ELIG (‘European 
Learning Industry Group). 

Claire Walsh was admitted as a 
Solicitor in 2006 and is Head of 
Legal at LTG. Claire was appointed 
as Company Secretary on 1 
December 2019 and since then 
she has been heavily involved with 
LTG’s acquisition strategy. Her prior 
experience includes advising on 
corporate, technology and data 
protection matters as a Partner at 
City law firm Cannings Connolly, and 
serving as Deputy General Counsel 
and director at Liquidity Services, 
Inc. (NASDAQ: LQDT).

37  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  38

Corporate Governance Report (continued)

The Workings of the Board

Board Composition and Roles

The role of the Board is to establish the vision and corporate 
strategy for LTG in order to promote and deliver long-term 
sustainable shareholder value. The Board of Directors 
comprises the Non-Executive Chairman, the Chief Executive, 
Chief Financial Officer and Chief Strategy Officer, and 
the three Non-Executive Directors and is responsible to 
shareholders for the proper management of the Group. The 
Board of Directors is supported by the Company Secretary. 

The Chairman is primarily responsible for the working of the 
Board of LTG. The Chief Executive is primarily responsible 
for the running of the business and implementation of the 
Board strategy and policy. The Chief Executive is assisted in 
the managing of the business on a day-to-day basis by the 
Managing Directors of the operating businesses, the Chief 
Financial Officer and the Executive Board of LTG.

Given the rapidly increasing size and complexity of the 
Group, the Board assisted by the Executive Board, continually 
reviews the appropriateness of the management structure 
and governance framework. Particularly due to the increased 
proportion of revenues and staff in the US the Company 
has made a number of changes to the management and 
governance structures, ensuring that a number of senior 
roles are based outside the UK and reporting lines continually 
reviewed. The Group continues to review and improve its 
investment in good governance initiatives and in October 
2020 the Board appointed Simon Boddie as the fourth Non-
executive Director.

The Board is responsible for formulating, reviewing and 
approving the Group’s strategy, budgets and corporate 
actions. High-level strategic decisions are discussed and 
taken by the full Board. Investment decisions (above a 
de minimis level) are taken by the full Board. Operational 
decisions are taken by the Executive Board and Managing 
Directors within the framework approved in the annual 
financial plan and within a framework of Board-approved 
authorisation levels.

The Board meets at least 10 times a year and met 13 times 
during 2020 (2019: 13).

It is the responsibility of the Chairman and the Company 
Secretary to ensure that Board members receive sufficient 
and timely information on corporate and business issues to 
enable them to discharge their duties. 

Appointments

Vacancies on the Board are filled following rigorous 
evaluation of suitable candidates possessing an appropriate 
balance of skills, knowledge and experience. The use of 
recruitment consultants is considered on a case-by-case 
basis. New Directors receive formal guidance about the 
workings of the Board and its Committees. In addition, 
shortly after their appointment, they meet with the senior 
management of the Group and receive detailed information 
and presentations on Group strategy, products and services. 
All Directors are subject to annual re-election by shareholders. 

The service agreements for each of the Directors are 
available for inspection at LTG’s registered office in London.

Directors’ & Officers’ Insurance

The Group holds appropriate insurance to cover Directors 
and Officers against the costs of defending themselves in 
civil proceedings taken against them in their capacity as a 
Director or Officer of the Company.

Conflicts of Interest 

Directors and Officers are encouraged to make the relevant 
disclosures at each Board meeting on any conflicts of interest 
they may have with the Group. During the period ended 31 
December 2020 no Director or Officer had a material interest 
in any contract with the Group other than their Service Contract 
and as set out in Note 31 on related party transactions. 

Director Independence and Training

The Chairman of the Board and his fellow Non-executive 
Directors bring a range of experience and judgement to bear 
on issues of strategy, performance, resources and standards 
of conduct, which are vital to the success of the Group. 
It is the Board’s opinion that the Non-executive Directors, 
excluding the Chairman, are independent in character and 
judgement and comply with provision B.1.1. of the Code.

To enable the Board to discharge its duties, all Directors 
have full and timely access to all relevant information. They 
also have access to management and to the advice of the 
Company Secretary. Furthermore, all Directors are entitled to 
seek independent professional advice concerning the affairs 
of the Group at its expense, although no such advice was 
sought during the year. The Board members have many years 
of relevant experience and each is responsible for ensuring 
their continuing professional development to maintain their 
effective skills and knowledge.

To enable the Board to discharge its responsibilities effectively, 
all Directors are able to allocate sufficient time to the Group. 
The Committees of the Board have terms of reference for 
the conduct of their respective responsibilities. A summary 
of the terms of reference are detailed further in this report 
in addition to being noted on LTG’s website. Copies of the 
terms of reference are also available upon request. The Board 
considers that there is a strong, independent Non-executive 
element on the Board.

Board committees

The Board maintains two standing committees, being the 
Audit & Risk and Remuneration Committees. Matters normally 
reserved for a Nominations Committee are considered by the 
full Board.

The minutes of all sub-committees are circulated for review 
and consideration by all relevant Directors, supplemented by 
oral reports from the Committee Chairmen at Board meetings.

Audit & Risk Committee 

The Audit & Risk Committee is chaired by Leslie-Ann Reed 
and currently comprises Leslie-Ann Reed, Aimie Chapple 
and Simon Boddie. The Audit & Risk Committee met three 
times during 2020 (2019: three). Further details on the Audit & 
Risk Committee are provided in the Report of the Audit & Risk 
Committee.

Remuneration Committee

The Remuneration Committee is chaired by Aimie Chapple 
and currently comprises Aimie Chapple, Leslie-Ann Reed and 
Simon Boddie. The Remuneration Committee met four times 
during 2020 (2019: once). Further details on the Remuneration 
Committee are provided in the Report of the Remuneration 
Committee.

Meetings of the Board and sub-committees during 2020 were as follows:

Board meetings

Audit and Risk committee

Remuneration committee

Number of meetings held 
in 2020

Andrew Brode

Leslie-Ann Reed

Aimie Chapple

Simon Boddie

Jonathan Satchell

Neil Elton

Piers Lea

Claire Walsh

13

12/13

13/13

13/13

3/3

13/13

13/13

13/13

13/13

*Attendance to at least part of meeting by invitation

3

- 

3/3

3/3

- 

-

3/3*

-

3/3*

4

- 

4/4

4/4

2/2

-

-

-

-

39  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  40

Report of the Audit & Risk Committee

Composition

External Audit

The Audit & Risk Committee comprises three independent 
Non-executive Directors: Leslie-Ann Reed (Chair), Aimie 
Chapple and Simon Boddie. The Committee meets at 
least twice a year and these meetings are attended 
by the Group’s external auditor and, through invitation, 
the Executive Directors, other Group executives and the 
Company Secretary. 

The Committee oversees LTG’s financial reporting process 
on behalf of the Board. LTG’s management has the 
primary responsibility for the financial statements and for 
maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting. 
In fulfilling its oversight responsibilities, the Committee 
reviewed and discussed the audited consolidated financial 
statements in the Annual Report with the external auditor 
and management, including a discussion of the quality, 
not just the acceptability, of the accounting principles; the 
reasonableness of significant judgements; the clarity of 
disclosures in the financial statements; and for assessing the 
effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting.

The Board is confident that there is sufficient recent and 
relevant financial experience on the Committee and that 
as a whole, the Committee has competence relevant to 
the sector in which the Company operates. The Committee 
has access to the financial expertise of the Group and its 
auditor and can seek professional advice at the Company’s 
expense if required. In addition, the Committee also 
carries out rigorous enquiries and challenges the executive 
management and auditor as to internal control and risk 
management systems, the processes followed for the 
implementation and enactment of policies and best 
practice, providing additional detail and explanation to the 
Committee of each area of the audit report, and about how 
developments in audit practice and international accounting 
standards could potentially impact LTG and the effectiveness 
of the planning processes for such developments. 

Fair, balanced and understandable accounts

In fulfilling its responsibility of monitoring the integrity of 
financial reports to shareholders, the Committee considers 
and reviews the accounting principles, policies and practices 
adopted in the preparation of public financial information 
and examines documentation relating to the Annual Report, 
Interim Report, preliminary announcements and other related 
reports. The Committee has given due consideration as to 
whether the Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, 
is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the 
information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s 
position and performance, business model and strategy and 
can confirm that this is the case. 

The appointment of BDO LLP (‘BDO’) as auditor during the 
year will be subject to confirmation by the shareholders at the 
2021 Annual General Meeting. The Committee is responsible 
for approving the external auditor’s terms of engagement, 
scope of work, the process for the interim review and the 
annual audit. The Committee also meets with the auditor to 
review the written reports submitted and the findings of their 
work. The Committee has primary responsibility for making 
recommendations to the Board on the appointment, re-
appointment and removal of the external auditor.

Outside of the formal Committee meetings, members also 
meet with the external auditor and with individual members 
of the Group’s executive management, principally to discuss 
the risks and challenges faced by the business and, most 
importantly, how these are being addressed.

The Committee, at least annually, assesses the 
independence, tenure and quality of the external auditor.

In relation to the 2020 Annual Report the Committee gave 
particular attention to revenue recognition, internal controls, 
acquisition accounting, the carrying value of goodwill and 
other intangibles and going concern. Further details of 
some of the critical accounting estimates and judgements 
relating to revenue recognition, acquisition accounting and 
impairment reviews are set out in Note 3. A summary of the 
review procedures to assess going concern are set out in 
Note 2a. 

During their first year audit BDO determined that the 
term licence contracts at Rustici represented two distinct 
obligations; the upfront licence and ongoing support. 
This was a different conclusion from that reached by 
management and agreed with LTG’s prior auditors at the 
time of transition to IFRS15 in 2017. Following a review of the 
application of the revenue recognition policy to term licence 
contracts in the Rustici CGU, the 2018 and 2019 balance 
sheets have been restated to recognise a proportion of the 
revenue on delivery rather than all revenue being recognised 
over time. Further details are given in Note 4.

Internal Audit

The Board as a whole has considered whether the Group’s 
internal controls processes would be significantly enhanced 
by an internal audit function and has taken the view that, 
given the size of the Group, the internal controls in place 
and significant executive involvement in the Group’s day-
to-day business, an internal audit function is not required at 
this stage. However, the Committee and the Board will be 
keeping this under review.

Report on the Work of the Committee 

The Committee reviews the independence and objectivity 
of the external auditor prior to the proposal of a resolution to 
shareholders at the Annual General Meeting concerning the 
appointment and remuneration of the auditor. This process 
includes the review of audit fee proposals, investigation 
and approval for non-audit services’ fees, tenure and audit 
partner rotation (based on best practice and professional 
standards within the United Kingdom). The Group’s auditor, 
BDO, similarly considers whether there are any relationships 
between itself and the Group that could have a bearing 
upon BDO’s independence and has confirmed its 
independence to us. Each year the Committee obtains 
written confirmation of auditor’s independence. 

Crowe UK LLP (‘Crowe’) had been the Group’s auditors since 
LTG listed on the London Stock Exchange in November 
2013. Following a competitive tender process, in which it 
was mutually agreed that Crowe would not participate, we 
appointed BDO as our new statutory auditor on 11 November 
2020. This appointment followed an assessment of BDO’s 
reputation, quality of service, expertise, resources available to 
the Group and the effectiveness of the audit process. It will be 
subject to shareholder confirmation at the 2021 AGM. There 
were no reasons for and no other matters connected with 
Crowe ceasing to hold office as auditors of the Company.

Following its appointment BDO undertook no specific 
pieces of non-audit work (including work in relation to tax 
compliance and financial due diligence). Further details 
of non-audit fees are included in Note 8 to the financial 
statements. The Committee will continue to assess the 
effectiveness and independence of the external auditor.

Internal Controls and Risk Management

The Group’s corporate objective is to maximise long-term 
shareholder value. In doing so, the Directors recognise 
that creating value is the reward for taking business risks. 
The Board’s policy on risk management encompasses all 
significant business risks to the Group, including financial, 
operational and compliance risks, which could undermine 
the achievement of business objectives. Regular monitoring 
of risk and control processes, across headline risk areas 
and other business-specific risk areas, provides the basis 
for regular and exception reporting to management and 
the Board. The risk assessment and reporting criteria is 
designed to provide the Board with a consistent, group-
wide perspective of the key risks. The reports to the Board, 
which are submitted at least every 12 months, include an 
assessment of the likelihood and impact of risks materialising, 
as well as risk mitigation initiatives and their effectiveness. 

The Board has overall responsibility for the Group’s approach 
to assessing risk and systems of internal control, and for 
monitoring their effectiveness. Due to the limitations that are 

inherent in any system of internal control, such a system is 
designed to manage rather than eliminate the risks of failure 
to achieve business objectives and provides only reasonable 
and not absolute assurance against material misstatement 
or loss. The Board considers risk assessment and control to be 
fundamental to achieving its corporate objectives within an 
acceptable risk/reward profile and confirms that there is an 
ongoing process for identifying, evaluating and managing 
the significant risks faced by the Group and the effectiveness 
of related controls. The principal risks and uncertainties of the 
Group are set out in the Strategic Report. 

The key features of the internal control system are described 
below:
Control environment – LTG is committed to high standards 
of business conduct and seeks to maintain these standards 
across all of its operations. There are also policies in place for 
the reporting and resolution of suspected fraudulent activities. 
LTG has an appropriate organisational structure for planning, 
executing, controlling and monitoring business operations in 
order to achieve its objectives. 

Risk identification – management is responsible for the 
identification and evaluation of key risks applicable to their 
areas of business. These risks are assessed on a continual 
basis and may be associated with a variety of internal and 
external sources, including infringement of IP, sales channels, 
investment risk, staff retention, disruption in information 
systems, natural catastrophe and regulatory requirements.

Information systems – Group businesses participate in 
periodic operational/strategic reviews and annual plans. 
The Board actively monitors performance against the plan. 
Forecasts and operational results are consolidated and 
presented to the Board on a regular basis. Through these 
mechanisms, performance is continually monitored, risks 
identified in a timely manner, their financial implications 
assessed, control procedures re-evaluated and corrective 
actions agreed and implemented.

Main control procedures – LTG has implemented control 
procedures designed to ensure complete and accurate 
accounting for financial transactions and to limit the 
exposure to loss of assets and fraud. Measures taken include 
segregation of duties and reviews by management.

Monitoring and corrective action – there are clear and 
consistent procedures in place for monitoring the system of 
internal financial controls.

This process, which operates in accordance with the FRC 
guidance, was maintained throughout the financial year, 
and has remained in place up to the date of the approval 
of these Financial Statements. The Board, via the Audit & 
Risk Committee, has reviewed the systems and processes 
in place in meetings with the Chief Financial Officer and 
external auditors during 2020.

41  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  42

Report of the Remuneration Committee

Summary Statement 

The Remuneration Committee comprises three Independent 
Non-executive Directors: Aimie Chapple (Chair), Leslie-Ann 
Reed, and Simon Boddie.

The Remuneration Committee monitors the remuneration 
policies of LTG to ensure their alignment with the Group’s 
business objectives. Its terms of reference include the 
recommendation and execution of policy on Executive 
Director remuneration. The remuneration of the Non-

executive Directors is a matter for the Board, excluding the 
Non-executive Directors. The remuneration of the Chairman is 
a matter for the Remuneration Committee, although Andrew 
Brode has waived all remuneration. Other Non-executive 
Directors receive a base salary only.

Service contracts

The service contracts and letters of appointment of the 
Directors include the following terms:

seeks to nurture and promote talent within the business 
supplementing it, where appropriate, with external talent.

The Committee met four times in 2020 (2019: 1).

Annual Report on Remuneration

This Annual Report on Remuneration sets out the information 
about the remuneration of the Directors of the Company, 
for the year ended 31 December 2020 and arrangements 
for the year ended 31 December 2021. The Directors of 
the Company are considered to be the Key Management 
personnel of the Group. 

Directors’ emoluments and benefits include: (audited)

Date of Contract

Notice Period (months)

Year ended 31 December 2020

Salary or fees

Bonuses

Pension 
contribution

Gain on exercise of 
share options

£’000 

 £’000

£’000

 £’000

Executive Directors

Jonathan Satchell

Neil Elton

Piers Lea

Non-executive Directors

Andrew Brode

Leslie-Ann Reed

Aimie Chapple

Simon Boddie

08/11/2013

03/11/2014

25/06/2014

08/11/2013

25/06/2014

03/09/2018

21/09/2020

6

6

6

1

1

1

1

There are no additional financial provisions for termination. All 
are rolling contracts. The Executive Directors are employed on 
a full-time basis and the Non-executive Directors are required 
to provide sufficient time to fulfil their duties including time 
to prepare for and attend Board and Committee meetings 
and to meet with shareholders and other stakeholders. All 
Directors are required to put themselves up for re-election on 
an annual basis.

In 2019 LTG published its Directors remuneration policy; 
this policy is set out below. After a period of consultation 
with LTG’s major shareholders during February and March 
2020 all shareholders were invited to vote on the Directors’ 
remuneration policy at the 2020 AGM for which 97% of votes 
were in favour. 

LTG has undergone transformative growth over the past 
few years and at the time of this report ranks in the top 20 
companies listed on AIM and is approximately the 260th 
largest listed company in the UK by market capitalisation. 
Given the rapid growth and complexity of LTG, the 
dynamic market environment and evolving corporate 

governance expectations, the Remuneration Committee 
has appointed a third-party consultant to carry out a review 
of the remuneration levels of the executive Directors and 
the Company’s Executive Board in line with best market 
practice, taking into account LTG’s strategic ambitions. The 
Remuneration Committee is planning to complete the review 
shortly and will then consult with major shareholders. The 
resulting remuneration policy will be put into effect from this 
year and will be published in the 2021 Annual Report and 
Accounts. At the 2022 AGM, the Board will seek shareholder 
approval to adopt the new remuneration policy for executive 
Directors and members of the Company’s Executive Board.

The Committee also carries out regular Board Effectiveness 
Reviews to ensure that the Board continues to operate as a 
well-functioning, balanced team led by the Chairman. The 
last review was held in 2019; reviews are scheduled every 
three years. Evaluation criteria include a review of the Group’s 
strategy, its relationship with shareholders and other key 
stakeholders, the performance of the Board and the standing 
committees, executive remuneration and incentives, 
governance, and performance and succession. The Board 

Andrew Brode

Jonathan Satchell

Neil Elton

Piers Lea

Leslie-Ann Reed

Aimie Chapple

Simon Boddie

-

300

240

200

50

50

13

853

-

52

42

35

-

-

-

129

-

9

7

6

-

-

-

22

-

-

1,088

-

-

-

-

1,088

2,092

Total 

 £’000

-

361

1,377

241

50

50

13

Year ended 31 December 2019

Salary or fees

Bonuses
(postponed)

Pension 
contribution

Gain on exercise of 
share options

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

Andrew Brode

Jonathan Satchell

Neil Elton

Piers Lea

Leslie-Ann Reed

Aimie Chapple

-

300

239

200

50

50

839

-

216

192

160

-

-

568

-

9

7

6

-

2

24

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Total 

£’000

-

525

438

366

50

52

1,431

Key management remuneration

Short-term employee benefits

Long-term employee benefits

Share-based payments

Total key management remuneration

2020

 £’000

1,004

1,088

334

2,426

2019

 £’000

1,431

-

265

1,696

43  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  44

Report of the Remuneration Committee (continued) 

Directors’ emoluments and benefits are stated for the 
Directors of Learning Technologies Group plc only. The 
amounts shown were recognised as an expense during the 
year. The CEO’s salary in 2020 represented 5.1 times the 
median salary of all employees in LTG (2019: 4.9 times). 

Simon Boddie was appointed as a Non-Executive Director 
effective 1 October 2020. 

There were no other short-term or long-term benefits, post-
employment benefits or termination benefits paid to Directors 
in either of the years ended 31 December 2020 or 31 
December 2019. 

Following the impact of COVID-19 management took a 
number of precautionary actions including implementing 
a pay freeze for all staff. In line with this policy there were 
no changes to the Group Directors’ base salaries in 2020 
from the prior year. As part of these precautionary measures 
the Executive Directors also agreed to postpone their 2019 
bonus payments until market conditions normalised. All other 
employees were paid their annual bonus awards in March 
2020. The Executive Director bonus awards were paid in the 
second half of 2020.

The details of the 2020 Executive Bonus Scheme were 
agreed, along with other employee bonus schemes, prior to 
the impact of COVID-19. The 2020 Executive Bonus Scheme 
rules are set out below and include details of the maximum 
and actual bonus levels achieved. Bonuses in the year were 
to be awarded based on a combination of achievement of 

Adjusted EBIT (‘EBIT’) and organic revenue growth targets for 
the Group, based on budget assumptions at the beginning 
of the year (the ‘original target’). These targets are equivalent 
to annual bonus targets set for other LTG staff who are 
incentivised based on the results of the Group rather than a 
specific business unit. An on-target achievement for each of 
EBIT and organic revenue growth would result in 80% of Base 
Salary being awarded as a bonus. Any additional bonus 
is awarded wholly based on further incremental organic 
revenue growth, subject to on-target EBIT margins being 
maintained on the higher revenue achieved. The maximum 
bonus payable is capped at 150% of base salary. No EBIT or 
revenue bonus would be payable if actual EBIT was less than 
target EBIT. The EBIT targets are adjusted at the reasonable 
discretion of the Remuneration Committee to account for 
events such as acquisitions or disposals. The specific targets 
are not given in this report as that information is deemed 
commercially sensitive.

Following the impact of COVID-19 and the detailed reforecast 
undertaken by management in March and April 2020 an 
additional one-off ‘Sprint Bonus’ scheme was implemented 
for all staff in 2020. For all Central staff other than the 
Executive Board the Sprint Bonus was set to reward employees 
up to their on-target bonus award for overachieving the 
reforecast Group EBIT target. For Executive Directors the 
maximum Sprint Bonus achievable was capped at 24% 
rather than 80% of salary. The resulting Sprint Bonus achieved 
represents 17% of salary as set out in the table below. 

Total as a % of  
Base Salary

CEO

24%

Maximum

CFO

24%

CSO

24%

CEO

17%

Achieved

CFO

17%

CSO

17%

Subject to the independent review of the Directors Remuneration Policy currently being undertaken Directors’ base salaries with 
effect from 1 January 2021 are as follows and the Remuneration Committee has determined to operate the 2021 Executive 
Bonus Scheme on a similar basis to 2020.

Executive Directors

Jonathan Satchell

Neil Elton

Piers Lea

Non-executive Directors

Andrew Brode

Leslie-Ann Reed

Aimie Chapple

Simon Boddie

Base Salary in 2020

Base Salary in 2021

£’000

£’000

300

240

200

-

50

50

50

315

252

210

-

50

50

50

Directors’ interests in the shares of the Company at 31 December 2020 and 31 December 2019 are as follows:

LTG Ordinary shares of  
£0.00375 each

Options

Shares

2020

2019

2020

2019

2020

2019

Weighted Average Exercise  
Price (pence)

Number

Number

Andrew Brode

-

-

-

-

117,098,930

116,920,080

Jonathan Satchell

68.400

68.400

26,315

26,315

75,336,845

75,139,995

Leslie-Ann Reed

-

-

-

-

4,839,463

6,458,180

Neil Elton

Piers Lea

50.226

42.471

3,026,315

4,026,315

439,562

439,562

55.100

-

32,667

-

8,714,030

8,714,030

50.433

42.639

3,085,297

4,052,630

206,428,830

207,671,847

45  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  46

Report of the Remuneration Committee (continued) 

Senior managers in LTG are granted share options in the 
Company. Share options are generally granted over a 
period of four years and only vest based on challenging 
performance criteria. The exercise price is set at the prevailing 
market price at the time the options are granted. No options 
over shares were granted to Executive directors in 2020.

Neil Elton was granted 1,000,000 share options in January 
2015, 2,000,000 share options in April 2017 and 1,000,000 
share options in July 2019 subject to vesting criteria based on 
a minimum share price being sustained for 30 consecutive 
days as set out below and subject to a minimum three-
year vesting period for all share options under each grant. 
3,333,333 of the share options have vested, of which 
1,000,000 have been exercised as set out below.

Date

16 January 2015

16 January 2015

16 January 2015

5 April 2017

5 April 2017

23 July 2019

23 July 2019

Type

EMI

EMI

EMI

Unapproved

Unapproved

Unapproved

Unapproved

No

-

-

-

1,000,000

1,000,000

500,000

500,000

3,000,000

Minimum share price 
vesting requirement 
(pence)

Exercise Price (pence)

24.000

28.000

32.000

55.000

70.000

150.000

180.000

42.300

19.000

19.000

19.000

37.500

37.500

75.200

75.200

31.333

The balance of interest in share options for Neil Elton and in total for Jonathan Satchell and Piers Lea is in relation to their 
participation in the contributory LTG Sharesave scheme. 

On 22 September 2020 Neil Elton exercised 1,000,000 share options under the EMI scheme.

See Note 28 for further details on share option plans. 

Dividends paid to Directors during the year were as follows.

2020

£’000

1,548

Total

See Note 32 for further details on dividends.

2019

£’000

1,245

47  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  48

Report of the Remuneration Committee (continued) 

Remuneration Policy

As part of the adoption of the QCA Guidelines the Remuneration Committee has made no changes to the LTG Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy following its review in 2019. Shareholders voted in favour of the policy at the 2020 AGM. As discussed 
earlier in the report the Remuneration Committee is undertaking an independent review of the Remuneration Policy and will 
propose and put to a vote a revised Remuneration Policy at the 2022 AGM to be implemented with effect from the 2021 
financial year. 

Element

Purpose and link to strategy

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance measures

Base salary

Pension

Benefits

Annual bonus

The role of the base salary is to support the 
recruitment and retention of Executive Directors of the 
calibre required to deliver and develop strategy.
Base salary provides fixed remuneration for the role, 
which reflects the size and scope of the Executive 
Directors’ responsibilities and their experience.

To provide an appropriate level of retirement benefit 
as part of a holistic benefit package.

The Committee sets base salary, taking into account 
the individual’s skills and experience and their 
performance, salary levels at equivalent peers on 
AIM, and pay and conditions elsewhere in the Group.
Base salary is normally reviewed annually with 
changes effective from 1 January but may be 
reviewed more frequently if the Committee determines 
this is appropriate.

Executive Directors are entitled to receive up to a 
3% matched company contribution to their personal 
pension plan. This is in line with all other LTG UK 
employees and minimum legislated requirements.

While there is no maximum salary, increases will normally be in 
line with the typical level of increase awarded to other colleagues 
in the Group. However, increases may be above this level in 
certain circumstances such as where a new Executive Director 
has been appointed to the Board at a lower than typical market 
salary to allow for growth in the role then larger increases may be 
awarded to move salary positioning closer to typical market level 
as the Executive Director gains experience.

3% of salary.

To provide a market-competitive level of benefits for 
the Executive Directors.

In line with other LTG UK employees including 26 days 
annual holiday in addition to public holidays.

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

The role of the annual bonus is to reward Executive 
Directors for the delivery of LTG’s annual financial, 
operational and strategic goals. The performance 
measures have been selected as they are considered 
to be key to delivering long-term shareholder value 
creation.

The annual bonus is normally payable in cash 
following completion of the audit of the Annual 
Report and Accounts. Performance is assessed over a 
financial year.

The Committee determines the level of bonus taking 
into account performance against targets and the 
underlying performance of the business.

Maximum annual bonus opportunity of 150% of base salary.
For details of award levels for prior years see the Annual Report on 
Remuneration.

The annual bonus may be based on a mix of financial, 
operational, strategic and individual performance measures. At 
least 70% of the bonus will be based on financial performance.

The Committee determines the exact metrics each year 
depending on the key goals for the forthcoming year.

Normally around 50% of the maximum bonus is paid for threshold 
performance with the full bonus being paid for delivering 
stretching levels of performance. These vesting levels may vary 
each year depending on the stretch of targets set.

The Committee sets bonus targets each year to ensure that they 
are appropriately stretching in the context of the business plan.

The maximum initial award is 3 million share options. Further 
options may be granted once the initial vesting period has 
elapsed.

The Committee sets targets at the time of each award so 
that targets are stretching and represent value creation for 
shareholders while remaining motivational for management.

LTIPs

The role of the LTIPs is to reward Executive Directors 
for achieving LTG’s long-term strategy and creating 
sustainable shareholder value, to align the economic 
interests of Executive Directors and shareholders, and 
to act as a retention tool.

Awards normally vest based on performance over 
a period of not less than four years (unless the 
Committee determines otherwise).

The Committee has the discretion to amend the final 
vesting level if it does not consider that it reflects the 
underlying performance of the Company.

LTIP awards are normally awarded in the form of 
options over shares but may be awarded in other 
forms.

Vested options may normally be exercised until the 
tenth anniversary of the date at grant.

Financial instruments and risk management

List of Directors

A full list of Directors who served in the year ended 31 
December 2020 is as follows:

•  Andrew Brode

•  Simon Boddie (from 1 October 2020)

49  

 plc Annual Report 2020

Directors’ Report

For the year ended 31 December 2020

The Directors present their report on the Group, together 
with the audited Consolidated Financial Statements for 
the year ended 31 December 2020.

Principal activities  

The principal activity of the Group is the provision of 
talent and learning solutions; content, services and 
digital platforms, to the corporate market. The principal 
activity of the Company is that of a parent holding 
company which manages the Group’s strategic 
direction and underlying subsidiaries.

Cautionary statement

The review of the business and its future development 
in the Strategic Report has been prepared solely to 
provide additional information to shareholders to 
assess the Group’s strategy and the potential for this 
strategy to succeed. It should not be relied on by any 
other party for any other purpose. The review contains 
forward-looking statements which are made by the 
Directors in good faith based on information available 
to them up to the time of the approval of the reports 
and should be treated with caution due to the inherent 
uncertainties associated with such statements. 

Results and dividends

The results of the Group are set out in detail on page 60.

At the time of LTG’s admission to AIM in November 2013, 
the Board stated that it would pursue a progressive 
dividend policy. On 30 October 2020 the Company 
paid an interim dividend of 0.25 pence per share (2019: 
0.25 pence per share), together with the postponed 
final dividend for 2019 of 0.50 pence. Given the robust 
performance of the Group during the past year the 
Directors propose to pay a final dividend of 0.50 pence 
per share for the year ended 31 December 2020, 
equating to a total payout in respect of the year of 0.75 
pence per share (2019: 0.75 pence per share).

Business review and future developments

Details of the business activities and acquisitions 
made during the year can be found in the Strategic 
Report and in Note 14 to the Consolidated Financial 
Statements.

Political donations

The Group made no political donations during the year 
(2019: nil). 

Disclosures regarding financial instruments are 
provided within the Strategic Report and Note 33 to the 
Financial Statements.

Capital Structure

Details of the Company’s share capital, together with 
details of the movements therein are set out in Note 
27 to the Financial Statements. The Company has one 
class of ordinary share which carries no right to fixed 
income. The Company has one branch registered in the 
Philippines: NetDimensions Services Asia Limited.

Research and development

The main areas of research and development for 
the Group has been the continuing development 
of the PeopleFluent, Watershed and Gomo software 
platforms, Rustici’s interoperability software and xAPI-
enabled analytical software tools, the Breezy HR 
talent acquisition platform, and various other software 
developments, as covered in the Strategic Report.

Post balance sheet events

Details of post events since the reporting date can 
be found in Note 35 to the Consolidated Financial 
Statements.

Workforce Policies and Employment Engagement 

We are committed to the investment in our staff at all 
levels to ensure a culture of continuous improvement. In 
order to attract and retain a high calibre of employees 
we provide various employee benefit packages 
including performance-related bonuses and Sharesave 
plans in order to align employee interests with the 
long-term strategic objectives of the Group. We are 
committed to our equality and diversity policies and 
seek regular feedback and engagement from our 
workforce. Further information regarding our work 
policies and engagement can be found in the Social 
section of the ESG report.

SECR Disclosures

In 2020 we report for the first time under the SECR 
framework. The Board took the decision to go beyond 
mandated disclosure to report on total emissions 
for all Group companies and to include Scope 3 
GHG (greenhouse gas) emissions in addition to 
Scopes 1 and 2. For further details please refer to the 
Environmental Sustainability section.

 plc Annual Report 2020  50

Throughout the financial year, the Company 
maintained Directors’ and Officers’ Liability insurance 
policies on behalf of the Directors of the Company. 
These policies meet the Companies Act 2006 definition 
of a qualifying third-party indemnity provision.

Directors’ interests in shares and contracts

Directors’ interests in the shares of LTG at 31 December 
2020 and 31 December 2019 are disclosed in the Report 
of the Remuneration Committee. Directors’ interests 
in contracts of significance to which LTG was a party 
during the financial year are disclosed in Note 31.

Substantial interests (greater than 3%)

As at the date of this report, LTG has been advised of 
the following significant interests (greater than 3%) in its 
ordinary share capital:

•  Leslie-Ann Reid

•  Aimie Chapple

•  Jonathan Satchell

•  Neil Elton

•  Piers Lea

Shareholder

Andrew Brode

Jonathan Satchell

Ordinary shares held

% held

117,098,930

75,336,845

15.84

10.19

8.52

5.31

5.22

4.18

4.12

4.08

4.05

Liontrust Asset Management

62,950,769

Kabouter Management

BlackRock

Octopus Investments

39,232,756

38,622,121

30,896,695

Jupiter Asset Management

30,447,661

Janus Henderson Investors

30,130,056

Liontrust Sustainable Investments

29,918,884

51  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  52

Directors’ Responsibilities Statement in respect of the 
Annual Report and the Financial Statements

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate 
accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain 
the Company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable 
accuracy at any time the financial position of the Company 
and the Group and enable them to ensure that the Financial 
Statements comply with the Companies Act 2006. They are 
also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Company 
and the Group and hence for taking reasonable steps for the 
prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities.

Website publication
The directors are responsible for ensuring the annual report 
and the financial statements are made available on a 
website. Financial statements are published on the company’s 
website in accordance with legislation in the United Kingdom 
governing the preparation and dissemination of financial 
statements, which may vary from legislation in other 
jurisdictions. The maintenance and integrity of the company’s 
website is the responsibility of the directors. The directors’ 
responsibility also extends to the ongoing integrity of the 
financial statements contained therein.

The Directors are responsible for preparing the annual report 
and the financial statements in accordance with applicable 
law and regulations. 

Company law requires the Directors to prepare Financial 
Statements for each financial year. Under that law the 
Directors have elected to prepare the Consolidated Financial 
Statements in accordance with International Financial 
Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the EU and 
applicable law and the Company Financial Statements 
in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice including Financial Reporting Standard 
102. Under company law the directors must not approve the 
financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give 
a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Group and 
company and of the profit or loss of the Group and company 
for that period. The directors are also required to prepare 
financial statements in accordance with the rules of the 
London Stock Exchange for companies trading securities on 
AIM. In preparing these Financial Statements, the Directors are 
required to: 

•  Select suitable accounting policies and then apply them 

consistently;

•  Make judgements and accounting estimates that are 

reasonable and prudent;

•  State whether they have been prepared in accordance 
with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union, subject to 
any material departures disclosed and explained in the 
financial statements;

•  Prepare the Financial Statements on the going concern 

basis unless it is inappropriate to assume that the 
Company will continue in business. 

Directors’ Report (continued)

For the year ended 31 December 2020

Except as referred to above, the Directors are not aware 
of any person who held an interest of 3% or more of the 
issued share capital of the company or could directly 
or indirectly, jointly or severally, exercise control.

QCA Requirements

The Directors have given due regard to the need 
to foster the Company’s business relationships with 
suppliers and other stakeholders. Please see the ESG 
report for further information.

The Company’s Code of Conduct is kept under review 
by the Board.

Annual General Meeting 

The Annual General Meeting (‘AGM’) will be held on 26 
May 2021. The notice of the AGM which will be sent to 
shareholders in advance of the meeting will contain the 
full text of the resolutions to be proposed and the venue 
for the meeting. 

Independent auditors 

In accordance with Section 489 of the Companies Act 
2006, a resolution proposing that BDO’s appointment 
is confirmed will be proposed at the Annual General 
Meeting.

Provision of information to auditors

Each of the persons who are Directors at the time when 
this Directors’ Report is approved has confirmed that:

• 

• 

So far as that Director is aware, there is no relevant 
audit information of which the Company’s auditors are 
unaware, and

That Director has taken all steps that ought to have 
been taken as a Director in order to be aware of any 
information needed by the Company’s auditors in 
connection with preparing their report and to establish 
that the Company’s auditors are aware of that 
information.

Signed by order of the Board

Claire Walsh
Company Secretary

24 March 2021

53  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  54

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of 
Learning Technologies Group plc

Opinion on the financial statements 
In our opinion:

• 

• 

• 

• 

the financial statements give a true and fair view of the 
state of the Group’s and of the Parent Company’s affairs 
as at 31 December 2020 and of the Group’s profit for the 
year then ended;

the Group financial statements have been properly 
prepared in accordance with international accounting 
standards in conformity with the requirements of the 
Companies Act 2006;

the Parent Company financial statements have been 
properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom 
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice; and

the financial statements have been prepared in 
accordance with the requirements of the Companies  
Act 2006.

We have audited the financial statements of Learning 
Technologies Group plc (the ‘Parent Company’) and its 
subsidiaries (the ‘Group’) for the year ended 31 December 
2020 which comprise the Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income, the Consolidated and Company 
Statements of Financial Position, the Consolidated 
and Company Statements of Changes in Equity, the 
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows and notes to the 
financial statements, including a summary of significant 
accounting policies. 

The financial reporting framework that has been applied 
in the preparation of the Group financial statements is 
applicable law and international accounting standards 
in conformity with the requirements of the Companies 
Act 2006. The financial reporting framework that has 
been applied in the preparation of the Parent Company 
financial statements is applicable law and United Kingdom 
Accounting Standards, including Financial Reporting 
Standard 102 The Financial Reporting Standard in the 
United Kingdom and Republic of Ireland (United Kingdom 
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice).

Basis for opinion 

We conducted our audit in accordance with International 
Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our 
responsibilities under those standards are further described 
in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial 
statements section of our report. We believe that the audit 
evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to 
provide a basis for our opinion.

Independence 

We remain independent of the Group and the Parent 
Company in accordance with the ethical requirements that 

are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the 
UK, including the FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to listed 
entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities 
in accordance with these requirements.

Conclusions relating to going concern
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that 
the Directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting 
in the preparation of the financial statements is appropriate. 
Our evaluation of the Directors’ assessment of the Group and 
the Parent Company’s ability to continue to adopt the going 
concern basis of accounting included:

•  A critical evaluation of the Director’s assessment of the 

entity’s ability to continue as a going concern, covering 
the period of 12 months from the date of approval of the 
financial statements by; 

• 

• 

• 

• 

Evaluating the process the Directors followed to make 
their assessment, including confirming the assessment 
and underlying projections were prepared by appropriate 
individuals with sufficient knowledge of the detailed 
figures as well as an understanding of the entities 
markets, strategies and risks. 

Understanding, challenging and corroborating the 
key assumptions included in their cash flow forecasts 
against prior year, our knowledge of the business and 
industry, and other areas of the audit.

Searching through enquiry with the Directors, review of 
board minutes and review of external resources for any 
key future events that may have been omitted from cash 
flow forecasts and assessing the impact these could 
have on future cash flows and cash reserves.

Assessing stress test scenarios, including those in respect 
of COVID-19 considerations, and challenging whether 
other reasonably possible scenarios could occur and 
including these where appropriate

•  Confirming that sensitised cashflow forecasts prepared 

by the Directors included the preparation of a reverse 
stress test to analyse the level of reduction in trade 
that could be sustained before a covenant breach or 
liquidity shortfall would be indicated. We assessed the 
assumptions and accuracy of these calculations.

•  Confirming the financing facilities, repayment terms 

and financial covenants to supporting documentation. 
We reviewed the Director’s assessment of covenant 
compliance throughout the forecast period to 31 
December 2022 including compliance within sensitised 
cash flow forecasts.

•  Considering the adequacy of the disclosures relating 

to going concern included within the annual report 
against the requirements of the accounting standards 
and consistency of the disclosures against the forecasts 
and going concern assessment.

Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, 
individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the Group and the Parent Company’s ability to continue as a going 
concern for a period of at least twelve months from when the financial statements are authorised for issue. 

Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the Directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections 
of this report.

Overview 

96% of Group adjusted profit before tax

Coverage7

91% of Group revenue

94% of Group total assets

Revenue recognition

Key audit matters

Impairment of goodwill and other intangibles

Acquisition accounting 

Materiality

Group financial statements as a whole

£1.9m based on 5% of Adjusted profit before tax

2020

An overview of the scope of our audit

Our involvement with component auditors

Our Group audit was scoped by obtaining an understanding 
of the Group and its environment, including the Group’s 
system of internal control, and assessing the risks of 
material misstatement in the financial statements. We also 
addressed the risk of management override of internal 
controls, including assessing whether there was evidence 
of bias by the Directors that may have represented a risk of 
material misstatement.

We identified 15 components of which three were identified 
as significant based on their financial contribution (more 
than 15% of Adjusted profit before tax). Specific scope 
procedures were also performed over an additional 
component. Where a component was considered 
significant it was subject to full scope audit by the group 
audit team (2 significant components) or the component 
auditor, BDO US, a member of the BDO network (1 significant 
component). The group audit team’s work on the other 
components comprised analytical procedures and certain 
specified audit procedures.

For the work performed by the component auditor, we 
determined the level of involvement needed in order to 
be able to conclude whether sufficient appropriate audit 
evidence has been obtained as a basis for our opinion on 
the Group financial statements as a whole. Our involvement 
with the component auditor included issuing detailed audit 
instructions, attending key meetings remotely (including those 
with local management), directing the scope and approach 
of the audit, and performing a detailed review remotely of 
the audit files.

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional 
judgement, were of most significance in our audit of the 
financial statements of the current period and include the 
most significant assessed risks of material misstatement 
(whether or not due to fraud) that we identified, including 
those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit 
strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit, and 
directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters 
were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial 
statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, 
and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

7 These are areas which have been subject to a full scope audit or specific procedures by the group engagement team

55  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  56

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of 
Learning Technologies Group plc (continued)

Key audit matter

Revenue recognition 

(with reference to notes 3, 4 and 5)

How the scope of our audit addressed the key audit matter

The Group has a number of revenue streams spanning multiple brands and business units. The revenue recognition policy varies depending on the 
underlying contract and performance obligations. 

We developed an understanding of the key revenue processes from inception to disclosure in the financial statements and assessed the design and 
implementation of the controls over the Group’s revenue cycles. 

Contracts can contain multiple performance obligations which require identification and separate accounting treatment. The allocation of transaction 
prices to performance obligations can be complex. 

We met with group management and finance teams, and local business unit management and finance teams, to develop our understanding of the group 
revenue streams and performance obligations. 

Where revenues are recognised over time based on percentage completion based on costs, estimation is required to assess the percentage and margin 
on individual contracts. 

We obtained a sample of contracts and critically assessed if the revenue recognition policy applied was appropriate, in line with IFRS 15, and accurately 
reflected the contract and performance obligations. 

Following a review of the revenue recognition policy applied to revenue in the Rustici cash generating unit, the directors decided that that the contracts 
comprised multiple performance obligations including certain that should be recognised at point in time on delivery, rather than a single performance 
obligation for which all revenue was recognised over time. 

This correction in accounting has resulted in a restatement of the opening reserves, deferred income and tax provisions at 1 January 2019. There is no 
impact on the income statement for the year ended 31 December 2019. 

For a sample of revenue contracts recognised over time, we verified the accounting treatment to contract and source, and verified that the inputs to the 
schedule generating revenue recognition were accurate. 

For a sample of revenue contracts recognised based on percentage completion we obtained evidence of contract completion. For a sample of contracts 
ongoing at the year end we also verified the basis and accuracy of the revenue cut off. 

Key observations:  
Based on the procedures we performed we did not identify anything which suggested material error or omission relating to revenue recognition. 

Impairment of goodwill and other intangibles 

(with reference to notes 3 and 15)

The Directors perform annual impairment reviews of goodwill for all cash generating units (CGUs).

We tested management’s allocation of assets for each CGU and verified the allocation based on our knowledge of the Group and its operations. 

This review also covers the carrying value of other intangible assets, property plant and equipment, and other assets of the CGUs.

Impairment reviews require significant estimate and judgement from management based on assumptions in respect of future trading performance. Due to 
the impact of Covid-19 on the Group there is increased uncertainty surrounding management’s trading assumptions in respect of certain CGUs.

Key assumptions include revenue assumptions including project work and renewal of contracts. 

The impairment test is also based on key assumptions in respect of the appropriate discount rates and longer-term growth rates.

 As a result of the review, management did not identify any impairments. 

We challenged management’s assumptions and assessed the achievability of the forecasts included in the impairment model using a number of techniques 
including assessing accuracy of historic forecasting, industry trends and our knowledge of the business and industry, including specific focus on the impact of 
COVID-19 on each CGU.

We also challenged management on any significant changes in assumptions compared to prior year and inconsistencies across the other impairment reviews.

We utilised our own valuation specialists, particularly around the mechanics and mathematical accuracy of the modelling and assessing the adequacy of 
the discount rates applied, comparing this against the cost of capital for the Group and other comparable companies in the industry. 

We considered management’s sensitivities and performed our own sensitivities in respect of key assumptions, including short and long term trading 
performance, revenue assumptions including contract renewal and project work, to assess the potential impairment of goodwill.

Key Observations: 
Based on the procedures we performed we did not identify anything which may suggest that the carrying value of goodwill and other intangibles  
should be impaired.

Acquisition accounting

(with reference to notes 3 and 14)

The Group completed 5 acquisitions during the year, 3 of which were material to the Group (open LMS, eThink and eCreators).

Acquisition accounting is complex and highly judgemental. Management used specialist firms to prepare the purchase price allocation (PPA) for Open LMS 
and eThink. 

The acquired intangible assets are primarily related to customer relationships and software tools. Key other fair value adjustments relate to the recognition of 
deferred income at fair value. 

For certain acquisitions, consideration includes contingent consideration linked to continuous employment, which is treated as acquisition related 
contingent consideration and earn-out expense over the service period. 

For all acquisitions completed in the year, we obtained the acquisition agreements, PPAs and supporting documentation and management’s paper on the 
accounting treatment and key judgements. We also confirmed the independence and qualification of management’s experts.

For material acquisitions, the audit team, together with internal valuation specialists, critically assessed the acquisition accounting and PPA process, 
including the completeness of the acquisition balance sheets, identification process for intangible assets, and the fair value exercise to acquired assets 
and assumed liabilities. 

We considered the treatment of contingent consideration by reference to the contractual terms, including where linked to continuous employment, and 
confirmed the proposed accounting was appropriate. 

Key Observations: 
Based on the procedures we performed we did not identify anything which suggested material error or omission in the acquisition accounting or disclosures.

57  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  58

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of 
Learning Technologies Group plc (continued)

Our application of materiality 

We apply the concept of materiality both in planning 
and performing our audit, and in evaluating the effect of 
misstatements. We consider materiality to be the magnitude 
by which misstatements, including omissions, could influence 
the economic decisions of reasonable users that are taken on 
the basis of the financial statements. 

In order to reduce to an appropriately low level the probability 
that any misstatements exceed materiality, we use a lower 

materiality level, performance materiality, to determine 
the extent of testing needed. Importantly, misstatements 
below these levels will not necessarily be evaluated as 
immaterial as we also take account of the nature of identified 
misstatements, and the particular circumstances of their 
occurrence, when evaluating their effect on the financial 
statements as a whole. 

Based on our professional judgement, we determined 
materiality for the financial statements as a whole and 
performance materiality as follows:

Group financial statements

Parent company financial statements

Materiality

2020

£1.9m

2020

£1.3m

Basis for determining 
materiality

5% of Adjusted profit before tax 

2% of Total assets capped to 75% of  
Group materiality

We considered Adjusted profit before tax to be the 
most appropriate measure for the basis of materiality 
given it is a key performance indicator of group and 
management. Adjustments are included in note 6 to 
the financial statements.

Adjusted measures have been used as we believe  
this more appropriately reflects the Group’s  
underlying performance.

We considered total assets to be the most appropriate 
measure for the basis of materiality as the Parent 
Company is primarily an investment holding company

£1.33m

£0.91m

70% of Group materiality, based on our overall risk 
assessment, and impact of first year audit. 

70% of Company materiality, based on our overall risk 
assessment, and impact of first year audit.

Rationale for the 
benchmark applied

Performance 
materiality

Basis for determining 
performance 
materiality

Component materiality

Reporting threshold 

We set materiality for each significant component of the Group 
based on a percentage of between 9% and 68% of Group 
materiality dependent on the size and our assessment of the 
risk of material misstatement of that component. Component 
materiality ranged from £177,000 to £1,300,000. In the audit of 
each component, we further applied performance materiality 
levels of 70% of the component materiality to our testing to 
ensure that the risk of errors exceeding component materiality 
was appropriately mitigated.

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to 
them all individual audit differences in excess of £64,000. We 
also agreed to report differences below this threshold that, in 
our view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds.

Other information 
The directors are responsible for the other information. The 
other information comprises the information included in 
the annual report other than the financial statements and 
our auditor’s report thereon. Our opinion on the financial 
statements does not cover the other information and, except 
to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our report, we do 
not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon. Our 
responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing 
so, consider whether the other information is materially 
inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge 
obtained in the course of the audit, or otherwise appears 
to be materially misstated. If we identify such material 

inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are 
required to determine whether this gives rise to a material 
misstatement in the financial statements themselves. If, 
based on the work we have performed, we conclude that 
there is a material misstatement of this other information, we 
are required to report that fact.

We have nothing to report in this regard.

Other Companies Act 2006 reporting
Based on the responsibilities described below and our work 
performed during the course of the audit, we are required by 
the Companies Act 2006 and ISAs (UK) to report on certain 
opinions and matters as described below.

Strategic report and 
Directors’ report 

Matters on which we 
are required to report 
by exception

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:

• 

the information given in the Strategic report and the Directors’ report for the financial year for which the financial 

statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and

• 

the Strategic report and the Directors’ report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal 

requirements.

In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and Parent Company and its environment obtained in the 
course of the audit, we have not identified material misstatements in the strategic report or the Directors’ report.

We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in relation to which the Companies Act 2006 requires us to 
report to you if, in our opinion:

• 

• 

• 

• 

adequate accounting records have not been kept by the Parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit 
have not been received from branches not visited by us; or

the Parent Company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or

certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or

we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.

Responsibilities of Directors
As explained more fully in the Directors’ responsibilities 
statement, the Directors are responsible for the preparation 
of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they 
give a true and fair view, and for such internal control as the 
Directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of 
financial statements that are free from material misstatement, 
whether due to fraud or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the Directors are 
responsible for assessing the Group’s and the Parent 
Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, 
disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern 
and using the going concern basis of accounting unless 
the Directors either intend to liquidate the Group or the 
Parent Company or to cease operations, or have no realistic 
alternative but to do so.

59  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  60

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of 
Learning Technologies Group plc (continued)

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

For the year ended 31 December 2020

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of 
the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about 
whether the financial statements as a whole are free from 
material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, 
and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion. 
Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not 
a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with 
ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it 
exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are 
considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they 
could reasonably be expected to influence the economic 
decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial 
statements.

Extent to which the audit was capable of detecting 
irregularities, including fraud

Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-
compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures 
in line with our responsibilities, outlined above, to detect 
material misstatements in respect of irregularities, including 
fraud. The extent to which our procedures are capable of 
detecting irregularities, including fraud is detailed below:

•  We assessed the susceptibility of the Group’s financial 

statements to material misstatement, including how 
fraud might occur, by meeting with management from 
across the Group to understand where they considered 
there was a susceptibility to fraud. 

•  Our audit planning identified fraud risks in relation 

to management override and revenue recognition. 
(Revenue recognition has been assessed as a Key 
Audit Matter above). We considered the processes and 
controls that the Group has established to address risks 
identified, or that otherwise prevent, deter and detect 
fraud; and how management monitors that processes 
and controls.

•  We designed our audit procedures to detect 

irregularities, including fraud. Our procedures included 
journal entry testing, with a focus on large or unusual 
transactions based on our knowledge of the business; 
enquiries with the Head of Legal, Group Management; 
and focussed testing as referred to in the Key Audit 
Matters section above. We also directed the testing 
plan of the component auditor to ensure consistency of 
approach, challenge and corroboration. 

Our audit procedures were designed to respond to risks 
of material misstatement in the financial statements, 
recognising that the risk of not detecting a material 
misstatement due to fraud is higher than the risk of not 
detecting one resulting from error, as fraud may involve 
deliberate concealment by, for example, forgery, 
misrepresentations or through collusion. There are inherent 
limitations in the audit procedures performed and the further 
removed non-compliance with laws and regulations is 
from the events and transactions reflected in the financial 
statements, the less likely we are to become aware of it.

A further description of our responsibilities is available on 
the Financial Reporting Council’s website at: www.frc.org.
uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our 
auditor’s report.

Use of our report
This report is made solely to the Parent Company’s members, 
as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the 
Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so 
that we might state to the Parent Company’s members those 
matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report 
and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by 
law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone 
other than the Parent Company and the Parent Company’s 
members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for 
the opinions we have formed.

Kieran Storan 
(Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of 

BDO LLP 
Statutory Auditor 
London
24 March 2021

BDO LLP is a limited liability partnership registered in England 
and Wales (with registered number OC305127).

Year ended 31 Dec 2020

Year ended 31 Dec 2019

Revenue

Operating expenses

Share based payment charge

Operating profit

Adjusted EBIT 

Adjusting items included in Operating profit

Operating profit

Finance expenses

Profit before taxation

Income tax (expense)/credit

Profit for the year

Other comprehensive income:
Items that may be subsequently reclassified to profit or loss

Exchange differences on translating foreign operations

Total comprehensive income for the year attributable 
to owners of the parent Company

Earnings per share attributable to owners of the parent:

Basic (pence)

Diluted (pence)

Adjusted earnings per share:

Basic (pence)

Diluted (pence)

Note

5

6

7

8

11

12

12

12

12

£’000

132,324

(114,130)

(3,340)

14,854

40,348

(25,494)

14,854

(1,385)

13,469

3,935

17,404

(6,616)

10,788

2.450

2.382

4.417

4.294

£’000

130,103

(110,602)

(3,111)

16,390

41,022

(24,632)

16,390

(2,092)

14,298

(3,426)

10,872

(4,293)

6,579

1.628

1.584

4.470

4.351

61  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  62

Consolidated Statement of Financial Position

As at 31 December 2020

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

31 Dec 2018

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

31 Dec 2018

£’000

1,025

8,806

£’000  

(Restated)

£’000 

(Restated)

1,687

9,864

2,144

-

Non-current liabilities

Lease liabilities

Deferred tax liabilities

256,284

228,468

242,458

Other long-term liabilities

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Right of use assets

Intangible assets

Deferred tax assets

Other receivables, deposits and 
prepayments

Amounts recoverable on contracts

Current assets

Trade receivables

Other receivables, deposits and 
prepayments

Amounts recoverable on contracts

Amount owing from related parties

Cash and bank balances

Restricted cash balances

Total assets

Current liabilities

Lease liabilities

Trade and other payables

Borrowings

Corporation tax

ESPP scheme liability

Note

13

13

15

21

18

19

17

18

19

31

20

24

22

24

28

7,614

76

624

4,215

120

713

2,312

161

421

274,429

245,067

247,496

32,984

4,219

3,879

54

88,614

682

130,432

404,861

2,536

68,015

7,339

4,591

562

28,911

2,478

4,699

18

42,032

330

78,468

323,535

2,880

62,791

6,344

2,386

203

34,314

3,897

3,397

7

26,794

336

68,745

316,241

-

72,470

6,602

1,631

-

83,043

74,604

80,703

Note

24

21

23

24

26

27

30

30

30

30

30

£’000

7,722

25,617

7,635

11,073

701

52,748

135,791

269,070

2,853

231,671

31,983

(22,933)

7,439

(6,968)

25,025

£’000 

(Restated)

£’000 

(Restated)

9,077

25,257

6,343

31,858

853

73,388

147,992

175,543

2,509

148,216

31,983

(22,933)

4,413

(352)

11,707

-

26,299

6,908

31,657

301

65,165

145,868

170,373

2,501

147,560

31,983

(22,933)

1,608

3,941

5,713

Borrowings

Provisions

Total liabilities

Net assets

Shareholders’ equity

Share capital

Share premium account

Merger reserve

Reverse acquisition reserve

Share-based payment reserve

Foreign exchange translation reserve

Accumulated profits

Total equity attributable to the owners of the parent

269,070

175,543

170,373

The Notes on pages 65 to 113 form an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements

The Financial Statements on pages 60 to 113 were approved and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 24 March 
2021 and signed on its behalf by

Neil Elton
Chief Financial Officer

24 March 2021

63  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  64

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity

For the year ended 31 December 2020

Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows

For the year ended 31 December 2020

Share 
capital

Share 
premium

Merger 
reserve

Note

Reverse 
acquisition 
reserve

Share-
based 
payments 
reserve

Translation
reserve

Retained 
earnings

Total  
equity

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

Cash flows from operating activities

2,501

147,560

31,983

(22,933)

1,608

3,941

4,159

168,819

Profit before taxation

Adjustments for:

4

-

-

-

-

-

-

1,554

1,554

(Gain)/loss on disposal of PPE and right-of-use assets

2,501

147,560

31,983

(22,933)

1,608

3,941

5,713

170,373

Balance at  
31 December 2018 

Restatement due to IFRS 15 
Rustici application change

Balance at  
1 January 2019 

1 January 2019 restatement 
for IFRS 16 

Profit for the period

Exchange differences 
on translating foreign 
operations

Total comprehensive 
profit/(loss) for the 
period

Issue of shares

Share-based payment 
charge credited to equity

Tax credit on share options

Transfer on exercise and 
lapse of options

Dividends paid

Transactions with owners

Balance at 31 December 
2019

Profit for the period

Exchange differences 
on translating foreign 
operations

Total comprehensive 
profit/(loss) for the 
period

-

-

-

-

8

-

-

-

-

8

-

-

-

-

656

-

-

-

-

656

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

3,111

-

(306)

-

2,805

2,509

148,216

31,983

(22,933)

4,413

(352)

11,707

175,543

-

-

-

-

-

-

Issue of shares

344

83,455

Share-based payment 
charge credited to equity

Tax credit on share options

Transfer on exercise and 
lapse of options

Dividends paid

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Transactions with owners

344

83,455

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

3,340

-

(314)

-

3,026

(4,293)

10,872

6,579

Payment of acquisition-related contingent consideration and earn-outs

Share-based payment charge

Amortisation of intangible assets

Depreciation of plant and equipment

Depreciation of right-of-use assets

Finance expense

Interest on borrowings

Acquisition-related contingent consideration and earn-outs

Fair value movement on contingent consideration

Impairment of acquired intangibles

Interest income

Operating cash flows before working capital changes

(Increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables

(Increase)/decrease in amount recoverable on contracts

Increase/(decrease) in payables

Interest paid

Interest received

Income tax paid

Net cash flows from operating activities

Cash flows used in investing activities

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

Development of intangible assets

Acquisition of subsidiaries, net of cash acquired

Net cash flows used in investing activities

Dividends paid

Proceeds from borrowings

Repayment of bank loans

Issue of ordinary share capital net of share issue costs

Contingent consideration payments in the period

Payments for lease liabilities (principal and interest)

Net cash flows from / (used in) financing activities

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents

(2,529)

(2,529)

-

10,872

10,872

(4,293)

-

(4,293)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

664

3,111

1,352

1,352

306

-

(4,007)

(4,007)

(2,349)

1,120

-

17,404

17,404

(6,616)

-

(6,616)

(6,616)

17,404

10,788

-

-

83,799

3,340

1,137

1,137

314

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Year ended 31 Dec 2020

Year ended 31 Dec 2019

Note

£’000

13,469

(122)

3,340

25,639

769

2,476

614

911

3,511

(1,357)

(1,006)

-

(140)

48,104

(4,736)

(3,427)

3,883

43,824

(750)

140

(3,359)

39,855

(114)

(6,115)

(38,988)

(45,217)

(5,537)

18,182

(36,640)

80,581

(121)

(3,317)

53,148

47,786

42,032

(1,204)

88,614

15

13

13

7

7

6

6

13

15

14

32

24

24

27

25

20

£’000

14,298

2

3,111

23,305

1,171

2,501

716

1,487

3,509

-

(2,321)

-

(111)

47,668

7,392

(1,593)

(10,633)

42,834

(1,449)

111

(4,518)

36,978

(687)

(5,690)

(8,764)

(15,141)

(4,007)

16,057

(15,468)

664

-

(3,275)

(6,029)

15,808

26,794

(570)

42,032

Balance at 31 December 
2020

2,853

231,671

31,983

(22,933)

7,439

(6,968)

25,025

269,070

The notes on pages 65 to 113 form an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

(5,537)

(5,537)

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of the year

(4,086)

82,739

Exchange gains/(losses) on cash

Cash and cash equivalents at end of the year

65  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  66

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements 

For the year ended 31 December 2020

1. General information
Learning Technologies Group plc (‘the Company’) and its 
subsidiaries (together, ‘the Group’) provide a range of talent 
and learning solutions; content, services and digital platforms, 
to corporate and government clients. The principal activity 
of the Company is that of a holding company for the Group, 
as well as performing all administrative, corporate finance, 
strategic and governance functions of the Group. 

The Company is a public limited company, which is listed 
on the AIM Market of the London Stock Exchange and 
domiciled in England and incorporated and registered in 
England and Wales. The address of its registered office is 15 
Fetter Lane, London, EC4A 1BW. The registered number of 
the Company is 07176993.

2. Summary of significant accounting 
policies 

The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation 
of these Consolidated Financial Statements are set out 
below. These policies have been consistently applied unless 
otherwise stated. 

a) Basis of preparation

The Consolidated Financial Statements of Learning 
Technologies Group plc have been prepared in 
accordance with international accounting standards 
in conformity with the requirements of the Companies 
Act 2006. The Consolidated Financial Statements have 
been prepared under the historical cost convention, as 
modified for any financial instruments which are stated at 
fair value through profit or loss. The Consolidated Financial 
Statements are presented in pounds sterling, the functional 
currency of Learning Technologies Group plc and figures 
have been rounded to the nearest thousand.

Going concern

The Group meets its day-to-day working capital 
requirements from the positive cash flows generated by its 
trading activities and its available cash resources. These are 
supplemented when required by additional drawings under 
the Group’s committed $21.0 million revolving credit facility 
(RCF) and an uncommitted $28.0 million accordion facility, 
which are available until 2023. During the period, the Group 
drew down the RCF facilities to fund the acquisition of 
Open LMS in March. In May, following the successful equity 
placing raising gross proceeds of £81.8 million (£79.6 million 
net of fees), see Note 27, the RCF drawdown was fully 
repaid and the lenders agreed to postpone the term loan 
repayments in the second half of 2020; these postponed 

term loan repayments which total $4.2 million will be paid 
in equal quarterly instalments from the first quarter of 2021 
until the termination of the loan in April 2023. 

In early 2020 the Board took a number of actions to protect 
operating cash flow given the uncertainty of the impact 
of COVID-19. As the year progressed and cash flows 
remained resilient the Board was able to reverse many of 
the precautionary actions that had been taken including 
ending a salary deferral scheme, the repayment of all 
furlough grants received from the UK government and the 
payment of the postponed 2019 final dividend. The Group 
continues to hold a strong liquidity position overall at 31 
December 2020, with gross cash and cash equivalents of 
£88.6 million and net cash of £70.2 million (see Note 24) 
(31st December 2019: gross cash was £42.0 million and net 
cash £3.8 million). Whilst there are a number of risks to the 
Group’s trading performance, including from the COVID-19 
pandemic and its impact on the global economy, as 
summarised in the ‘Principal risks and uncertainties’ section 
on pages 25 to 26, the Group is confident of its ability to 
continue to access sources of funding in the medium term.

The Directors report that they have re-assessed the 
principal risks, reviewed current performance and 
forecasts, combined with expenditure commitments, 
including capital expenditure, business acquisitions, and 
borrowing facilities. The Group’s forecasts demonstrate 
it will generate profits and cash in the year ending 31st 
December 2021 and beyond. In addition, following the 
completion of the acquisitions of Reflektive, PDT Global 
and Bridge (refer to Note 35) in February and March of 
2021 for a total of c£59.7 million, the Group continues 
to have sufficient cash reserves to enable it to meet its 
obligations as they fall due, as well as operate within its 
banking covenants, for a period of at least 12 months from 
the date of signing of these financial statements. 

The Group has also assessed a range of downside 
scenarios to assess if there is a significant risk to the Group’s 
liquidity position. The forecasts and scenarios prepared 
consider our trading experience during the pandemic to 
date and we have modelled downside scenarios such as 
varying degrees of reductions in content & services project 
revenues, delay in new sales wins, extended customer 
payment days and various cost reductions. The directors 
have concluded that it is appropriate to adopt the going 
concern basis of accounting in preparing the Annual 
Report, having undertaken a review of a detailed forecast 
for 2021 and the impact this forecast has on the Group’s 
gross cash, net debt and ability to meet bank covenants 
under the existing facilities agreement.

Changes in accounting policies

Adjusting items

(i) New standards, interpretations and amendments 
adopted from 1 January 2020 

New standards impacting the Group that have been 
adopted in the annual financial statements for the year 
ended 31 December 2020 are:

Amendments to IFRS 3

Definition of a Business

Amendments to IFRS 9, IAS 
39 and IFRS 7

Amendments to IFRS 16

Amendments to IAS 1 and 
IAS 8

Interest Rate Benchmark 
Reform
COVID-19-Related Rent 
Concessions
Disclosure Initiative - 
Definition of Material

The Group has considered the above new standards and 
amendments and has concluded that, they are either 
not relevant to the Group or they do not have a significant 
impact on the Group’s consolidated financial statements.

(ii) New standards, interpretations and amendments not 
yet effective

At the date of authorisation of these consolidated 
Group financial statements, the following standards and 
interpretations, which have not been applied in these 
financial statements, were in issue but not yet effective 
(and in some cases had not yet been adopted by the 
EU). Management is currently assessing the impact of 
these new standards on the group.

Amendments to IAS 37

Amendments to IAS 16

Amendments to IFRS 3

Onerous Contracts – Cost of 
Fulfilling a Contract
Property, Plant and 
Equipment: Proceeds 
before Intended Use
References to Conceptual 
Framework

Alternative performance measures

The Group has identified certain alternative performance 
measures (“APMs”) that it believes will assist the 
understanding of the performance of the business. 
The Group believes that Adjusted EBIT, adjusting items, 
Shareholders’ funds and net cash / debt provide useful 
information to users of the financial statements. The terms 
are not defined terms under IFRS and may therefore not 
be comparable with similarly titled measures reported by 
other companies. They are not intended to be a substitute 
for, or superior to, IFRS measures and are discussed further 
in the Glossary on page 120. 

The Group has chosen to present an adjusted measure 
of profit and earnings per share, which excludes certain 
items which are separately disclosed due to their size, 
nature or incidence, and are not considered to be part 
of the normal operating costs of the Group. These costs 
may include the financial effect of adjusting items such 
as, inter alia, restructuring costs, impairment charges, 
amortisation of acquired intangibles, costs relating to 
business combinations, one-off foreign exchange gains 
or losses, integration costs, acquisition-related contingent 
consideration and earn-outs, joint venture profits and 
losses and fixed asset, right-of-use asset and lease liability 
disposal gains or losses.

 (b) Basis of consolidation

A subsidiary is defined as an entity over which the Group 
has control. The Group controls an entity when the Group 
is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its 
involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect 
those returns through its power over the entity. Subsidiaries 
are fully consolidated from the date on which control is 
transferred to the Group. They are deconsolidated from the 
date that control ceases.

Business combinations other than the share for share 
acquisition of Epic Group Limited by In-Deed Online plc in 
2013 are accounted for under the acquisition method and 
merger relief has been taken on recognising the shares 
issued on acquisition, where applicable.

Under the acquisition method, the results of the 
subsidiaries acquired or disposed of are included from 
the date of acquisition or up to the date of disposal. At 
the date of acquisition, the fair values of the subsidiaries’ 
net assets are determined and these values are reflected 
in the Consolidated Financial Statements. The cost of 
acquisition is measured at the aggregate of the fair values 
at the date of exchange, of assets given, liabilities incurred 
or assumed, and equity instruments issued by the Group 
in exchange for control of the acquiree. Any excess of 
the purchase consideration of the business combination 
over the fair value of the identifiable assets and liabilities 
acquired is recognised as goodwill. Goodwill, if any, is not 
amortised but reviewed for impairment at least annually. 
If the consideration is less than the fair value of assets and 
liabilities acquired, the difference is recognised directly 
in the statement of comprehensive income. Acquisition-
related costs are expensed as incurred.

Intra-group transactions, balances and unrealised gains 
on transactions are eliminated. Intragroup losses may 
indicate an impairment which may require recognition in 

67  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  68

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

the consolidated financial statements. Where necessary, 
adjustments are made to the Financial Statements of 
subsidiaries to ensure consistency of accounting policies 
with those of the Group.

identifiable acquisition-related intangible assets, in 
addition to other assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities 
purchased. These are amortised on a straight-line basis 
over their useful lives which are individually assessed. 

(c) Joint arrangements and associates

Under IFRS 11 investments in joint arrangements are 
classified as either joint operations or joint ventures 
depending on the contractual rights and obligations of 
each investor. The Company has assessed the nature of 
its joint arrangements and determined them to be joint 
ventures and they are, along with the Group’s associates, 
accounted for using the equity method.

Interests in joint ventures and associates are recognised at 
cost adjusted by the Group’s share of the post-acquisition 
profits or losses and any impairments, where appropriate. 
When the Group’s share of losses in a joint venture equals 
or exceeds its interests in the joint ventures and associates, 
the Group does not recognise further losses, unless it has 
incurred obligations or made payments on behalf of joint 
ventures and associates.

(d) Intangible assets

All intangible assets, except goodwill, are stated at cost 
less accumulated amortisation and any accumulated 
impairment losses.

Goodwill

Goodwill represents the amount by which the fair value of 
the cost of a business combination exceeds the fair value 
of the net assets acquired. Goodwill is not amortised and is 
stated at cost less any accumulated impairment losses.

The recoverable amount of goodwill is tested for 
impairment annually or when events or changes in 
circumstance indicate that it might be impaired. 
Impairment charges are deducted from the carrying value 
and recognised immediately in the income statement. For 
the purpose of impairment testing, goodwill is allocated 
to each of the Group’s cash-generating units expected 
to benefit from the synergies of the combination. If the 
recoverable amount of the cash-generating unit is less 
than the carrying amount of the unit, the impairment loss 
is allocated first to reduce the carrying amount of any 
goodwill allocated to the unit and then to the other assets 
of the unit pro-rata on the basis of the carrying amount of 
each asset in the unit. An impairment loss recognised for 
goodwill is not reversed in a subsequent period.

Acquisition-related intangible assets

Net assets acquired as part of a business combination 
includes an assessment of the fair value of separately 

Branding

2-10 years

Customer contracts and relationships

 2-12 years

Intellectual property

2-10 years

Research and development expenditure

Research expenditure is recognised as an expense when 
it is incurred.

Development expenditure is recognised as an expense 
except that costs incurred on development projects are 
capitalised as long-term assets to the extent that such 
expenditure is expected to generate future economic 
benefits. Development expenditure is capitalised only if it 
meets the criteria for capitalisation under IAS 38.

Capitalised development expenditure is measured at cost 
less accumulated amortisation and impairment losses, if 
any. Development expenditure initially recognised as an 
expense is not recognised as assets in subsequent periods.

Capitalised development expenditure is amortised on a 
straight-line method over a period of between three and 
five years when the products or services are ready for sale 
or use. In the event that it is no longer probable that the 
expected future economic benefits will be recovered, the 
development expenditure is written down to its recoverable 
amount. The amortisation charge is recognised within 
operating expenses.

(e) Functional and foreign currencies

(i) Functional and presentation currency

The individual Financial Statements of each entity in 
the Group are presented in the currency of the primary 
economic environment in which the entity operates, which 
is the functional currency. 

The Consolidated Financial Statements are presented in 
Pounds Sterling, which is the Group’s presentation currency. 

(ii) Transactions and balances

Transactions in foreign currencies are converted into the 
respective functional currencies on initial recognition, 
using the exchange rates approximating those ruling at 
the transaction dates. Monetary assets and liabilities at 
the end of the reporting period are translated at the rates 
ruling as of that date. Non-monetary assets and liabilities 
are translated using exchange rates that existed when the 
values were determined. All exchange differences are 
recognised in profit or loss.

(iii) Foreign operations

Assets and liabilities of foreign operations are translated 
to Pounds Sterling at the rates of exchange ruling at the 
end of the reporting period. Revenues and expenses 
of foreign operations are translated at the average rate 
of exchange. All exchange differences arising from 
translation are taken directly to other comprehensive 
income and accumulated in equity under the foreign 
exchange translation reserve. On the disposal of a foreign 
operation, the cumulative amount recognised in other 
comprehensive income relating to that particular foreign 
operation is reclassified from equity to profit or loss.

Goodwill and fair value adjustments arising from the 
acquisition of foreign operations are treated as assets 
and liabilities of the foreign operations and are recorded 
in the functional currency of the foreign operations and 
translated at the closing rate at the end of the reporting 
period. Exchange differences are recognised in other 
comprehensive income.

(f) Financial instruments

Financial instruments are recognised in the statements of 
financial position when the Group has become a party to 
the contractual provisions of the instruments.

Financial assets are derecognised when the contractual 
rights to receive cash flows from the financial assets have 
expired or have been transferred and the Group has 
transferred substantially all the risks and rewards  
of ownership.

(i) Financial assets 

On initial recognition, financial assets are classified 
as financial assets at amortised cost unless criteria 
are met for classifying and measuring the asset at fair 
value through profit or loss, or fair value through other 
comprehensive income. 

Management determines the classification of its financial 
assets at initial recognition. 

• 

 Loans and receivables financial assets

Trade receivables and other receivables are held 
within a business model whose objective is to 
collect contractual cash flows which are solely 
payments of principals and interest and therefore 
classified as subsequently measured at amortised 
cost using the effective interest method, less any 
impairment loss. Interest income is recognised 
by applying the effective interest rate, except for 
short-term receivables when the recognition of 
interest would be immaterial. The Group’s loans and 
receivables financial assets comprise ‘trade and other 

receivables’ and cash and cash equivalents included 
in the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position.

ii) Financial liabilities

Financial liabilities are recognised when, and only when, 
the Group becomes a party to the contractual provisions 
of the financial instrument.

All financial liabilities are recognised initially at fair 
value plus directly attributable transaction costs and 
subsequently measured at amortised cost using the 
effective interest method other than those categorised as 
fair value through profit or loss.

Fair value through the profit or loss category comprises 
financial liabilities that are either held for trading or 
are designated to eliminate or significantly reduce a 
measurement or recognition inconsistency that would 
otherwise arise. Derivatives are also classified as fair value 
through profit or loss unless they are designated as hedges. 

A financial liability is derecognised when the obligation 
under the liability is discharged, cancelled or expires. 
When an existing financial liability is replaced by another 
from the same party on substantially different terms, or the 
terms of an existing liability are substantially modified, such 
an exchange or modification is treated as a derecognition 
of the original liability and the recognition of a new liability, 
and the difference in the respective carrying amounts is 
recognised in the profit or loss.

(iii) Equity instruments

Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs 
directly attributable to the issue of new shares or options are 
shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from proceeds. 
Dividends on ordinary shares are recognised when paid.

Financial instruments are offset when the Group has a  
legally enforceable right to offset and intends to settle  
either on a net basis or to realise the asset and settle the 
liability simultaneously

(g) Property, plant and equipment 

Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less 
accumulated depreciation and impairment losses, if any. 
The cost of an item of property, plant and equipment 
initially recognised includes its purchase price and any 
cost that is directly attributable to bringing the asset to 
the location and condition necessary for it to be capable 
of operating in the manner intended by management. 
Subsequent costs are included in the asset’s carrying 
amount only when the cost is incurred and it is probable 
that the future economic benefits associated with the 
asset will flow to the Group and the cost of the asset can 
be measured reliably. 

69  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  70

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

Depreciation is calculated under the straight-line method 
to write off the depreciable amount of the assets over their 
estimated useful lives. The principal annual rates used for 
this purpose are:

Computer 
equipment

Furniture and fittings

Office equipment

33%

20%

20%

Leasehold 
improvements

Over  the  shorter  of  the  remaining 
useful life and life of the lease

The depreciation method, useful lives and residual values 
are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at the end of 
each reporting period to ensure that the amounts, method 
and periods of depreciation are consistent with previous 
estimates and the expected pattern of consumption of 
the future economic benefits embodied in the items of the 
property, plant and equipment. 

(h) Impairment 

(i) Impairment of financial assets

All financial assets (other than those categorised at fair 
value through profit or loss), are assessed at the end of 
each reporting period based on the deterioration of 
credit risk since initial recognition. An allowance for credit 
losses is recognised based on potential shortfalls in future 
cash flows discounted to present value multiplied by the 
likelihood of the shortfalls occurring. 

An impairment loss in respect of loans and receivables 
financial assets is recognised in profit or loss and is 
measured as the difference between the asset’s carrying 
amount and the present value of estimated future cash 
flows, discounted at the financial asset’s original effective 
interest rate.

In a subsequent period, if the amount of the impairment 
loss decreases and the decrease can be related 
objectively to an event occurring after the impairment was 
recognised, the previously recognised impairment loss is 
reversed through profit or loss to the extent that the carrying 
amount of the asset at the date the impairment is reversed 
does not exceed what the amortised cost would have 
been had the impairment not been recognised.

The Group has adopted the simplified expected credit 
loss model for its trade receivables and contract assets, 
as required by IFRS 9 to assess impairment, for further 
information see Note 33.

(ii) Impairment of non-financial assets

The carrying values of intangible assets are reviewed at 
the end of each reporting period for impairment when 
there is an indication that the assets might be impaired. 

Impairment is measured by comparing the carrying values 
of the assets with their recoverable amounts 

An impairment loss is recognised in profit or loss immediately. 

In respect of assets other than goodwill, and when 
there is a change in the estimates used to determine 
the recoverable amount, a subsequent increase in the 
recoverable amount of an asset is treated as a reversal 
of the previous impairment loss and is recognised to the 
extent of the carrying amount of the asset that would have 
been determined (net of amortisation and depreciation) 
had no impairment loss been recognised. The reversal is 
recognised in profit or loss immediately. 

(i) Income taxes

Income tax for each reporting period comprises current 
and deferred tax.

Current tax is the expected amount of income taxes 
payable in respect of the taxable profit for the year and is 
measured using the tax rates that have been enacted or 
substantively enacted at the end of the reporting period.

Deferred tax is provided in full, using the liability method, 
on temporary differences arising between the tax bases 
of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in the 
Financial Statements. 

Deferred tax liabilities are recognised for all taxable 
temporary differences other than those that arise from 
goodwill or from the initial recognition of an asset or liability 
in a transaction which is not a business combination and 
at the time of the transaction, affects neither accounting 
profit nor taxable profit.

Deferred tax assets are recognised for all deductible 
temporary differences, unused tax losses and unused tax 
credits to the extent that it is probable that future taxable 
profits will be available against which the deductible 
temporary differences, unused tax losses and unused tax 
credits can be utilised. The carrying amounts of deferred 
tax assets are reviewed at the end of each reporting period 
and reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that 
sufficient future taxable profits will be available to allow all or 
part of the deferred tax assets to be utilised.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured at the tax 
rates that are expected to apply in the period when the 
asset is realised or the liability is settled, based on the tax 
rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted at 
the end of the reporting period.

Unrecognised deferred tax assets are reassessed at each 
reporting date and are recognised to the extent that it 
has become probable that future taxable profit will allow 
deferred tax assets to be recovered.

(j) Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash in hand, bank 
balances, deposits with financial institutions and short-
term, highly liquid investments that are readily convertible 
to known amounts of cash and which are subject to an 
insignificant risk of changes in value.

Reporting of cash flows

The Group generally reports cash inflows and outflows 
gross and the drawdowns and repayments of the Group’s 
RCF have been disclosed within financing activities.

The Group has elected to present payments in relation to 
acquisition-related contingent consideration as operating 
cash flows when they relate to payments made to 
employees in respect of post-combination remuneration. 
Acquisition-related contingent consideration paid to 
former owners that do not continued to be employed by 
the Group are disclosed within financing activities.

The Group has elected to present interest paid and interest 
received from financial assets held for cash management 
purposes as operating cashflows.

(k) Employee benefits

(i) Short-term benefits

Wages, salaries, paid annual leave and sick leave, 
bonuses and non-monetary benefits are accrued in the 
period in which the associated services are rendered by 
employees of the Group.

(ii) Defined contribution plans

A defined contribution plan is a pension plan under which 
the Group pays fixed contributions into a separate entity. 
The Group has no legal or constructive obligations to pay 
further amounts if the fund does not hold sufficient assets 
to pay all employees the benefits relating to employee 
service in the current and prior periods. The Group’s 
contributions to defined contribution plans are recognised 
in profit or loss in the period to which they relate. 

(l) Provisions, contingent liabilities

Provisions for property lease dilapidations are recognised 
when the Group has a present or constructive obligation 
as a result of past events, when it is probable that an 
outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will 
be required to settle the obligation, and when a reliable 
estimate of the amount can be made. The cost is 
recognised as depreciation of leasehold improvements 
over the remaining term of the lease. The main uncertainty 
relates to estimating the cost that will be incurred at the 
end of the lease. Provisions are reviewed at the end of 
each financial reporting period and adjusted to reflect the 
current best estimate. Where the effect of the time value of 

money is material, the provision is the present value of the 
estimated expenditure required to settle the obligation.

A contingent liability is not recognised but is disclosed 
in the Notes to the Financial Statements when there is a 
possible obligation which arises from past events whose 
outcome is uncertain or when it is not probable that there 
will be an outflow of economic resources. When a change 
in the probability of an outflow occurs so that the outflow is 
probable, it will then be recognised as a provision.

(m) Revenue from contracts with customers and other income

Group revenue represents the fair value of the 
consideration received or receivable for the rendering 
of services and sale of software licencing, net of value 
added tax and other similar sales-based taxes, rebates 
and discounts after eliminating intercompany sales. The 
nature of the Group’s sales means there are no refunds or 
returns, and no warranties are offered.

(i) Content & Services

Revenue within the Group’s Content & Services division 
comprises of content, consulting, platform development 
and the provision of training which are provided under 
fixed-price and time and materials contracts. Fixed-
price contracts are recognised on the percentage of 
completion method unless the outcome of the contract 
cannot be reliably determined, in which case contract 
revenue is only recognised to the extent of contract costs 
incurred that are recoverable. This is because either the 
Group is creating an asset with no alternative use to it 
and the contract contains the right to payment for work 
completed to date, or the customer is simultaneously 
receiving and consuming the benefits of the Group’s 
services as it performs. Foreseeable losses, if any, are 
provided for in full as and when it can be reasonably 
ascertained that the contract will result in a loss. The stage 
of completion is determined based on the proportion 
of contract costs incurred compared to total estimated 
contract costs.

The cost-based method is used to determine the 
percentage of completion because as management 
has significant expertise in this approach they are able to 
assess the stage of completion and margin of a project on 
an accurate and consistent basis. 

Business development costs incurred as part of our bid 
or tender process are expensed as incurred. Only if 
and when a project is won and contracted are project 
costs accounted for within long-term contracts through 
operating expenses. There are no material costs incurred 
during the period between the contract being awarded 
and service delivery commencing. 

 
71  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  72

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

For fixed-price contracts, the customer pays the fixed 
amount based on a payment schedule. If the services 
rendered by the Group exceed the payment, an amount 
recoverable on contracts asset is recognised. Conversely, 
if the payments exceed the services rendered, a liability is 
recognised. If the contract is time- and materials-based 
and includes an hourly fee, revenue is recognised over time 
in the amount to which the Group has the right to invoice.

Contract work in progress is stated at costs incurred, less 
those amounts transferred to profit or loss, after deducting 
foreseeable losses and payments on account not 
matched with revenue.

Amounts recoverable on contracts are included in current 
assets and represent revenue recognised in excess of 
payments on account.

(ii) Software & Platforms

Revenue from subscriptions such as SaaS, “right to 
access” licences, hosting and support and maintenance 
is recognised evenly over the contractual period of the 
licence as the customer simultaneously receives and 
consumes the benefits of the Group’s services. 

Perpetual licences and on-premise software licences 
where all material obligations of the Group to the 
customer have been met on the delivery of the licence 
are recognised at the point in time when the software 
has been delivered to the customer as these meet the 
definition of “right to use” licences. 

Some contracts include multiple deliverables, such as 
professional service fees with the delivery of a licence. 
However, the professional services do not significantly 
customise the software and the promises in the contract 
are not highly interdependent, so these are recognised as 
separate performance obligations. Contracts may also 
include an on-premise software licence with support and 
maintenance services. The customer can benefit from both 
services on their own or with other readily-available resources 
and the software is functional upon transfer of the licence 
key, so these are recognised as separate performance 
obligations. Where multiple deliverables are concluded not 
to be distinct, they are combined with another deliverable 
until the distinct performance obligation definition is met. 
Where a contract includes multiple performance obligations, 
the transaction price will be allocated to each performance 
obligation based on the stand-alone selling prices where 
available. Where these are not directly observable, they are 
estimated based on expected cost plus margin.

Incremental contract costs are capitalised and amortised on 
a consistent basis with the pattern of transfer of the service to 
which the asset relates.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

(p) Leases

For services revenue, the stage of completion is determined 
based on the proportion of contract costs incurred compared 
to total estimated contract costs. The outcome of a 
development project can be determined with reasonable 
certainty when a project budget is agreed which sets out 
milestones and costs for all project deliverables. Staff and 
contractors record their actual time and external costs spent 
on each project which is regularly reviewed against budget.

In making its estimation as to the amounts recoverable on 
contracts, management considers estimates of anticipated 
revenues and costs from each contract and monitors the 
need for any provisions for losses arising from adjustments to 
underlying assumptions if this indicates it is appropriate. The 
amount of profit or loss recognised on a contract has a direct 
impact on the Group’s results and carrying value of amounts 
recoverable on contracts. The Directors are satisfied that their 
judgement is based on a reasonable assessment of the future 
prospects for each contract. 

During the year to 31 December 2020 management reviewed 
the contracts in place and did not note any contracts 
where there was specific increased estimation uncertainty. 
Management has reviewed contracts that were ongoing at 
the prior year end and there were no significant adjustments 
to the budgeted margin.

Where the stand-alone selling price of support and 
maintenance services bundled in an on-premise licence 
contract are not observable, management allocates the 
transaction price to the distinct performance obligations 
based on expected cost plus margin, the basis of this 
calculation is derived from historic experience and data.

(n) Operating segments

The Group operates as three reportable segments, the 
Software & Platforms division, the Content & Services division 
and the Other segment which includes rental income. 
An operating segment is a component of the Group that 
engages in business activities from which it may earn 
revenues and incur expenses, including revenues and 
expenses that relate to transactions with any of the Group’s 
other components. An operating segment’s operating 
results are reviewed regularly by the chief operating 
decision-maker to make decisions about resources to be 
allocated to the segment and assess its performance, and 
for which discrete financial information is available.

(o) Share-based payment arrangements

Equity-settled share-based payments to employees and 
others providing similar services are measured at the fair 
value of the equity instruments at the grant date. Details 
regarding the determination of the fair value of equity-
settled share-based transactions are set out in Note 28 to 
the Consolidated Financial Statements.

The Group as a lessee

The Group leases various offices and IT equipment. Rental 
contracts are typically made for fixed periods of six months 
to six years but may have extension options.

The Group assesses whether a contract is or contains a 
lease, at inception of the contract. The Group recognises 
a right-of-use asset and a corresponding lease liability with 
respect to all lease arrangements in which it is the lessee, 
except for short-term leases (defined as leases with a lease 
term of 12 months) and lease of low-value assets.

Assets and liabilities arising from a lease are initially 
measured on a present value basis. Lease liabilities 
include the net present value of the following lease 
payments:

• 

• 

fixed payments (including in-substance fixed 
payments), less any lease incentives receivable

variable lease payment that are based on an index or 
a rate, initially measured using the index or rate as at 
the commencement date

•  amounts expected to be payable by the Group under 

residual value guarantees

• 

the exercise price of a purchase option if the Group is 
reasonably certain to exercise that option, and

•  payments of penalties for terminating the lease, if the 
lease term reflects the Group exercising that option.

Lease payments to be made under reasonably certain 
extension options are also included in the measurement of 
the liability.

On transition to IFRS 16 the weighted average incremental 
borrowing rate applied to the lease liabilities recognised 
under IFRS 16 was 3.5%. The incremental borrowing rate 
used was based on the three-month LIBOR rates in the 
respective asset territories (98% of which were based in 
either the US or UK) plus a 1.6% margin commensurate with 
the margin payable under the Group’s debt finance facility 
as at 1 January 2019.

Lease payments are allocated between principal and 
finance cost. The finance cost is charged to profit or loss 
over the lease period so as to produce a constant periodic 
rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability for 
each period.

Right-of-use assets are measured at cost comprising  
the following:

• 

the amount of the initial measurement of lease liability

•  any lease payments made at or before the 

commencement date less any lease incentives 
received

•  any initial direct costs, and

• 

restoration costs.

Right-of-use assets are generally depreciated over the 
shorter of the asset’s useful life and the lease term on a 
straight-line basis.

The Group applies IAS 36 to determine whether a right-
of-use asset is impaired and accounts for any identified 
impairment loss as described in the Impairment  
policy above.

For leases acquired as part of a business combination, 
the lease liability is measured at the present value of 
the remaining lease payments. The right-of-use asset 
is measured at the same amount as the lease liability 
adjusted to reflect favourable or unfavourable terms of the 
lease when compared to market terms.

Payments associated with short-term leases and leases of 
low-value assets are recognised on a straight-line basis as 
an expense in profit or loss. Short-term leases are leases 
with a lease term of 12 months or less without a purchase 
option. Low-value assets generally comprise IT equipment 
and small items of office furniture.

The Group as a lessor

The Group enters into lease agreements as an 
intermediate lessor with respect to some of its property 
leases. It accounts for the head lease and the sublease as 
two separate contracts.

The sublease is classified as finance lease or operating 
lease by reference to the right-of-use asset arising from 
the head lease. Whenever the terms of the lease transfer 
substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership to the 
lessee, the contract is classified as a finance lease. All 
other leases are classified as operating leases. Rents 
receivable from operating leases are recognised on a 
straight-line basis over the term of the relevant lease.

73  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  74

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

(q) Government grants

Government grants are not recognised until there is 
reasonable assurance that the grants will be received 
and that the Group will comply with any conditions 
attached to them. 

Government grants are recognised in the income 
statement over the same period as the costs for which 
the grants are intended to compensate. Government 
grants that are receivable as compensation for expenses 
or losses already incurred or for the purpose of giving 
immediate financial support to the Group with no future 
related costs are recognised in profit or loss in the period in 
which they become receivable.

The Group received £84,000 from the UK Government as 
part of the furlough scheme and this was fully repaid in 
July 2020.

3. Summary of critical accounting 
estimates and judgements
The preparation of financial information in conformity with IFRS 
requires the use of certain critical accounting estimates. It also 
requires the Directors to exercise their judgement in the process 
of applying the accounting policies which are detailed above. 
These judgements are continually evaluated by the Directors 
and management and are based on historical experience and 
other factors, including expectations of future events that are 
believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. 

The key estimates and underlying assumptions concerning the 
future and other key sources of estimation uncertainty at the 
statement of financial position date, that have a significant 
risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amounts 
of assets and liabilities within the next financial period, are 
reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting 
estimates are recognised in the period in which the estimate is 
revised if the revision affects only that period, or in the period of 
the revision and future periods if the revision affects both current 
and future periods.

(i) Judgements

Revenue recognition

See Note 2 (m). 

Adjusting items

The Group has chosen to present an adjusted measure 
of profit and earnings per share, which excludes certain 
items which are separately disclosed due to their size, 
nature or incidence, and are not considered to be part 
of the normal operating costs of the Group. These costs 

may include the financial effect of adjusting items such 
as, inter alia, restructuring costs, impairment charges, 
amortisation of acquired intangibles, costs relating to 
business combinations, one-off foreign exchange gains 
or losses, integration costs, acquisition related contingent 
consideration and earn-outs, fair value movements on 
contingent consideration, joint venture profits and losses 
and fixed asset, right-of-use asset and lease liability 
disposal gains or losses. The Group believes that they 
provide additional useful information to users of the 
financial statements to enable a better understanding of 
the Group’s underlying financial performance.

The classification of items as adjusting requires significant 
management judgement. The definition of adjusting items 
has been applied consistently year on year. Further details 
of adjusting items are provided in Note 6.

(ii) Estimates

Business combinations and associated  
acquisition accounting 

Contingent Consideration

The agreements to acquire eCreators Pty Ltd and eThink 
Education LLC include provision for LTG to pay additional 
consideration to the selling shareholders in future 
years conditional on the achievement of challenging 
incremental revenue growth targets. We have evaluated 
each agreement in accordance with IFRS 3 to determine 
whether these payments should be included as part of the 
business combination or post-combination remuneration 
expensed to the income statement. Both agreements 
include conditions for continuing employment therefore we 
have concluded that these payments should be charged 
to the income statement.

The acquisition-related contingent consideration and 
earn-out liabilities usually include estimates of future 
financial performance against targets. When estimating 
the future financial performance, we use Board-approved 
budgets and, if the time frame goes beyond available 
budgets, reasonable growth rates assessed for each 
business thereafter. 

Identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed

As required by IFRS 3, we have measured the assets 
acquired and liabilities assumed of the acquisitions in the 
year at their fair value on acquisition. The fair values of 
contract liabilities at acquisition dates were estimated to 
obtain a price that would be paid to transfer the liability 
in an orderly transaction between market participants. 
The approach used was based on a market participant’s 

estimate of the costs that will be incurred to fulfil the 
obligation plus a normal profit margin, based on the 
overall cost profile over the life of the contract. This resulted 
in a fair value of contract liabilities in relation to Open LMS 
of £1.3 million below book value, the adjustment to all 
other acquisitions in the year was immaterial.

The fair value of these assets is determined by discounting 
estimated future net cash flows generated by the asset 
where no active market for the assets exists. The use of 
different assumptions for the expectations of future cash 
flows and the discount rate would change the valuation of 
the intangible assets.

Valuation of intangible assets

The determination of the fair value of assets and liabilities 
including goodwill arising on the acquisition of businesses, 
the acquisition of industry-specific knowledge, software 
technology, branding and customer relationships, whether 
arising from separate purchases or from the acquisition 
as part of business combinations, and development 
expenditure which is expected to generate future 
economic benefits, are based, to a considerable extent, 
on management’s estimations.

During the year to 31 December 2020, the Group acquired 
Open LMS, Patheer, Inc (‘Patheer’), JCA Solutions (‘JCA’), 
eCreators Pty Ltd (‘eCreators’) and eThink Education 
LLC (‘eThink’) see Note 14. We have outlined below the 
intangible assets recognised by the group on acquisition 
of each of these businesses, the valuation model used to 
establish the fair value and the associated values. 

Acquisition

Open LMS

Patheer

JCA

eCreators

eThink

Intellectual 
property

Customer 
relationships

Valuation methodologies

£3.4m

£0.2m

£0.2m

£1.4m

£5.1m

£9.9m

£Nil

£0.2m

£1.1m

£7.6m

Replacement cost and Excess earnings method respectively

Replacement cost and Excess earnings method respectively

Replacement cost and Excess earnings method respectively

Replacement cost and Excess earnings method respectively

Replacement cost and Excess earnings method respectively

We have outlined below a sensitivity analysis on the value of the acquired IP of each acquisition by changing the two 
significant assumptions used in each replacement cost model. The assumptions flexed being the time needed to rebuild the 
asset in the state it was acquired and the average employee salaries incurred in the rebuild.

Acquisition

Open LMS

Patheer

JCA

eCreators

eThink

Time to rebuild adjusted by 10%

Average employee salaries adjusted by 20%

+/- £0.30m

+/- £0.02m

+/- £0.02m

+/- £0.10m

+/- £0.50m

+/- £0.70m

+/- £0.03m

+/- £0.03m

+/- £0.30m

+/- £1.00m

75  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  76

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

We have outlined below a sensitivity analysis on the value of the acquired customer relationships of each acquisition by 
changing the two significant assumptions used in each excess earnings model. The assumptions flexed being annual 
projected revenues and attrition rate.

We have outlined below a sensitivity analysis detailing the impact of changing the useful economic lives of each of the 
acquired intangibles would have on the amortisation charged to profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 2020.

Acquisition

Open LMS

JCA

eCreators

eThink

Annual projected revenues adjusted by 10%

Annual attrition rate adjusted by 20%

Amortisation impact

Increase in amortisation (£’000) 

Decrease in amortisation (£’000) 

Acquired intangibles of:

Decreasing the useful economic life by 3 years

Increasing the useful economic life by 3 years

+/- £1.10m

+/- £0.02m

+/- £0.10m

+/- £0.80m

+/- £0.90m

+/- £0.02m

+/- £0.01m

+/- £0.20m

Open LMS

Patheer

JCA*

eCreators

eThink

(605)

(10)

(33)

(139)

(145)

254

3

11

40

43

Useful Economic Lives of Acquired Intangibles

On acquisition, the useful economic lives of acquired intangibles, which are key estimates, are assessed by management. 
We have outlined below the acquired intangibles arising from each acquisition during the year with their associated estimated 
useful economic lives.

Acquisition

Open LMS

Patheer

JCA

eCreators

eThink

Intellectual property

Customer Relationships

6 years

6 years

2 years

6 years

5 years

12 years

-

4 years

5 years

11 years

The useful economic life of the customer relationships was based on the historical length of relationships with top customers as 
well as observed attrition rates. The net present value of economic benefits to be derived from the asset beyond this period was 
considered to be immaterial.

In assessing the useful economic lives of the intellectual property management took factors into account such as how often the 
software is changing and developing and the historical change in the software code as well as external factors such as how 
the development framework is supported by third parties. 

*The impact outlined above for decreasing the acquired intangibles of JCA is as a result of decreasing the useful economic lives of both the acquired intangibles to 1 year. 

Any acquired brand’s useful economic life was based on how 
long management expects to derive economic benefits from 
the asset, and the net present value of economic benefits 
beyond this life appear to be immaterial. 

All useful economic lives were benchmarked against other 
guideline companies.

Impairment reviews

IFRS requires management to undertake an annual test for 
impairment of indefinite lived assets (goodwill) and, for finite 
lived assets, to test for impairment if events or changes in 
circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of an asset 
may not be recoverable.

Goodwill impairment testing is an area involving 
management estimates, requiring assessment as to whether 
the carrying value of assets can be supported by the net 
present value of future cash flows derived from such assets 
using cash flow projections which have been discounted at 
an appropriate rate. In calculating the net present value of 
the future cash flows, certain assumptions are required to 
be made in respect of highly uncertain matters including 
management’s expectations of:

•  Growth in adjusted EBIT;

• 

• 

Long-term growth rates; and

The selection of discount rates to reflect  
the risks involved.

The adjusted EBIT is calculated on the same basis as the 
adjusted EBIT within the Statement of Comprehensive Income. 
The Group prepares and approves a detailed annual budget, 
three-year strategic plan and five-year management plan for 
its operations, which are used in the value in use calculations.

See Note 15 for details of how these estimates and 
judgements have been applied

Deferred Tax

Income tax expense, deferred tax assets and liabilities and 
liabilities for unrecognised tax benefits reflect management’s 
best estimate of current and future taxes to be paid. The 
Group is subject to income taxes in the UK and several other 
foreign jurisdictions.

The deferred tax balances relate to temporary differences 
arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and 
their carrying amounts in the Financial Statements. Deferred 
tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable 
that the future taxable profits will allow the deferred tax 
assets to be recovered. In evaluating the Group’s ability to 
recover deferred tax assets in the jurisdiction from which they 
arise, management considers all available positive and 
negative evidence, including historic and projected future 
performance, and external market factors.

See Note 21 for details of how these estimates and 
judgements have been applied.

77  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  78

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

4. Prior year adjustment
Following a review of the IFRS 15 revenue recognition policy applied in the Rustici CGU, the Group has concluded that Rustici 
contracts include an additional distinct performance obligation, for which the revenue should be recognised at a point in time 
on delivery, rather than all over time as the more conservative policy previously applied. As a result of this correction in the 
accounting, the Group has restated the balance sheet at 1 January 2019 as outlined below. There has been no impact on the 
income statement for the years ended 31 December 2019 or 2020.

Non-current assets:

Property, plant and equipment

Intangible assets

Deferred tax assets

Other receivables, deposits and prepayments

Amounts recoverable on contracts

Current assets:

Trade receivables

Other receivables, deposits and prepayments

Amounts recoverable on contracts

Amount owing from related parties

Cash and bank balances

Restricted cash balances

Total Assets

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Borrowings

Corporation tax

Amount owing to related parties

Non-current liabilities

Deferred tax liabilities

Other long-term liabilities

Borrowings

Provisions

Total liabilities

Net assets

Shareholders’ equity

Share capital

Share premium account

Merger reserve

Reverse acquisition reserve

Share-based payment reserve

Foreign exchange translation reserve

Accumulated profits/(losses)

Total equity attributable to the owners of the parent

Note

Adjustments

31 Dec 2018

£’000

2,144

242,458

2,858

161

421

(546)

31 Dec 2018 
(Restated)

£’000

2,144

242,458

2,312

161

421

248,042

(546)

247,496

34,314

3,897

3,397

7

26,794

336

68,745

316,787

72,470

6,602

1,631

-

80,703

26,299

9,008

31,657

301

67,265

147,968

168,819

2,501

147,560

31,983

(22,933)

1,608

3,941

4,159

168,819

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(546)

-

-

-

-

-

-

(2,100)

-

-

(2,100)

(2,100)

1,554

1,554

1,554

34,314

3,897

3,397

7

26,794

336

68,745

316,241

72,470

6,602

1,631

-

80,703

26,299

6,908

31,657

301

65,165

145,868

170,373

2,501

147,560

31,983

(22,933)

1,608

3,941

5,713

170,373

5. Segment analysis
IFRS 8 requires operating segments to be identified on the basis of internal reports about components of the Group that are 
regularly reviewed by the chief operating decision-maker (which takes the form of the Board of Directors of the Company), in 
order to allocate resources to the segment and to assess its performance.

The Directors of the Company consider there to be three reportable segments, being the Software & Platforms division, the 
Content & Services division, and an Other segment which includes rental income. A majority of sales were generated by the 
operations in the United States in the year ended 31 December 2020 and in the year ended 31 December 2019.

Income and expenses relating to the Group’s administrative functions have been apportioned to the operating segments 
identified based on revenue.

Recurring and non-recurring revenue is defined in the Glossary on page 120.

Geographical information

The Group’s revenue from external customers and non-current assets by geographical location are detailed below.

UK

Mainland 
Europe

United States

Canada

Asia Pacific

Rest of the 
world

Total

£’000 

 £’000

£’000

 £’000

£’000

£’000

 £’000

31 December 2020

Revenue 

21,501

6,184

92,281

4,344

3,508

4,506

132,324

Non-current assets

28,206

-

223,310

24

15,267

8

266,815

31 December 2019

Revenue 

25,808

8,738

84,454

5,165

2,459

3,479

130,103

Non-current assets

31,029

-

194,658

29

15,136

-

240,852

The total non-current assets figure is exclusive of deferred tax assets in each of the periods above.

79  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  80

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

Revenue by nature

The Group’s revenue by nature is analysed as follows:

Software & Platforms

Content & Services

Other

On-
premise 
Software 
Licences

Hosting 
and SaaS

Support 
and 
Mainte-
nance

Total

Content

Platform 
development

Consulting 
& Other

Total

Rental 
Income

Total

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

6. Adjusting items

These items are included in normal operating costs of the business, but are significant cash and non cash expenses that are 
separately disclosed because of their size, nature or incidence. It is the Group’s view that excluding them from Operating Profit 
gives a better representation of the underlying performance of the business in the period. Further details of the adjusting items 
are included in Note 2.

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

31 Dec 2020

Recurring

16,643

76,345

3,817

96,805

-

1,021

9,212

10,233

Non-Recurring

1,129

1,033

1,053

3,215

12,906

3,541

5,526

21,973

17,772

77,378

4,870

100,020

12,906

4,562

14,738

32,206

Depreciation & 
amortisation

Adjusted EBIT

Amortisation 
of acquired 
intangibles*

Other adjusting 
items

Finance expenses

Profit / (Loss) 
before tax

Additions to 
intangible assets*

Total Assets

31 Dec 2019

Recurring

Non-Recurring

Depreciation & 
amortisation

Adjusted EBIT

Amortisation of 
acquired intangibles

Other adjusting 
items

Finance expenses

Profit / (Loss) 
before tax

Additions to 
intangible assets*

Total Assets 

(Restated)

13,861

1,633

67,014

759

15,494

67,773

4,666

697

5,363

(5,626)

32,224

(18,132)

(4,077)

(1,095)

8,920

62,433

342,941

85,541

3,089

88,630

(4,162)

31,577

(15,771)

(3,760)

(1,737)

10,309

15,729

223,441

98

-

98

107,136

25,188

132,324

(7,437)

98

40,348

-

-

-

(21,447)

(4,047)

(1,385)

Adjusting items included in Operating profit:

Amortisation of acquired intangibles

Loss on disposal of fixed assets

(Profit) on disposal of right-of-use assets 

Acquisition-related contingent consideration and earn-outs

Fair value movement on contingent consideration

Net foreign exchange loss arising due to business acquisition

Acquisition costs

Integration costs

Total adjusting items

£’000

21,447

21

(143) 

3,511 

(1,357)

1,070 

715

230 

25,494

£’000

20,872

2

- 

3,509 

-

- 

249

- 

24,632

(1,811)

8,026

(3,315)

30

(290)

-

18,345

18,345

1,623

6,903

8,526

9,298

5,203

14,501

4,451

98

13,469

-

61,920

10,921

30,451

41,372

(1,943)

9,344

(5,101)

-

(355)

101

-

101

-

101

-

62,433

404,861

96,563

33,540

130,103

(6,105)

41,022

(20,872)

(3,760)

(2,092)

3,888

101

14,298

-

100,094

-

-

15,729

323,535

As outlined above, the material adjustments are made in respect of:

•  Amortisation of acquired intangibles – these costs are excluded from the adjusted results of the Group since the costs 
are non-cash charges arising from investment activities. As such, they are not considered reflective of the core trading 
performance of the Group.

•  Acquisition-related contingent consideration and earn-outs – these costs are excluded from the adjusted results since 
these costs are also associated with business acquisitions and represent post-combination remuneration, which is not 
included in the calculation of goodwill and not considered part of the core trading performance of the Group.

• 

• 

Fair value movement on contingent consideration – similar to the above, any adjustments to contingent consideration 
through profit or loss are excluded from adjusted results on the basis that it is non-cash non-operational income.

Foreign exchange losses associated with business acquisitions – excluded from the adjusted results of the Group since 
these costs relate to investment activities and occur irregularly.

•  Costs of acquisition and integration – costs associated with completed acquisitions are excluded from the adjusted results 

on the basis they are directly attributable to investment activities, rather than the core trading activities of the Group.

* Includes additions from business combinations, refer to Note 15.

7. Finance expenses

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

Adjusted EBIT is the main measure of profit reviewed by the chief operation decision-maker. The total assets figure is inclusive of 
deferred tax assets in each of the periods above.

Total liabilities by Operating Segment are not regularly reviewed by the chief operation decision-maker and as such, are not 
included in the table above.

Information about major customers

In the year ended 31 December 2020 and the year ended 31 December 2019, no customer accounted for more than 10% of 
reported revenues. 

Charge on contingent consideration

Interest on borrowings

Interest on lease liabilities

Interest receivable

£’000

196 

911

418

1,525

(140)

1,385

£’000

248 

1,487

468

2,203

(111)

2,092

81  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  82

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

8. Profit before taxation
Profit before taxation is arrived at after charging/
(crediting): - 

Amortisation of software development costs

Fees payable to the company’s auditor and its associates 
for the audit of the Group’s annual accounts

Other fees payable to auditors:

- Corporate finance services

- Taxation

Depreciation

Directors’ fees (including compensation for loss of office)

Directors’ pension contributions

Lease expense – short term leases exempt from IFRS 16

Acquisition-related contingent consideration and earn-outs

Interest income

Note

15

13

10

10

Total research & development costs

Of which capitalised development costs

Capitalisation ratio

Amortisation of capitalised development costs

Research & development costs (including amortisation) recognised in P&L

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

10. Directors’ remuneration, interests and transactions
Directors’ remuneration, interests and transactions are disclosed in the Report of the Remuneration Committee. 

£’000

4,192

408

-

70

3,245

853

22

81

3,511

(140)

£’000

2,433

204

81

32

3,672

839

24

77

3,509

(111)

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

£’000 

16,265

6,115

38%

4,192

14,342

£’000 

17,932

5,690

32%

2,436

14,678

11. Income tax

Current tax expense:

- UK Current Tax on profits for the year

- Adjustments in respect to prior years

- Foreign Current Tax on profits for the year

Total current tax

Deferred tax (Note 21)

- Origination and reversal of temporary differences

- Adjustments in respect to prior years

- Change in deferred tax rate

Total deferred tax

Income tax expense/(credit)

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

£’000

£’000

626

376

4,087

5,089

(4,703)

(4,025)

(296)

(9,024)

(3,935)

511

706

4,156

5,373

(1,369)

(662)

84

(1,947)

3,426

9. Staff costs

The average monthly number of employees was:

Production

Administration

Management

Aggregate remuneration (including Directors):

Wages and salaries (including bonuses)

Social security costs

Share-based payments

Pension costs

Year ended 31 December 2020

Year ended 31 December 2019

No.

682

102

6

790

£’000

51,781

4,467

3,340

1,255

60,843

No.

626

100

6

732

£’000

49,168

4,104

3,111

1,083

57,466

In the 2021 budget it was announced the UK corporation tax rate would increase to 25% from 1 April 2023.

The deferred tax credit arising from the origination and reversal of temporary differences primarily relates to the deferred tax 
liability releases associated with acquired intangible amortisation and other temporary differences such as accelerated 
depreciation, share based payments, provisions and deferred revenue.

Current tax adjustments in respect to prior years primarily relates to minor variances between prior period provisions and final 
tax returns. 

The deferred tax adjustments in respect to prior years primarily relate to the reversal of a short term timing difference recognised 
in the prior year, the recognition of deferred tax assets relating to tax losses carried forward and changes in the market value of 
LTG shares when calculating the share-based payment deferred tax assets; refer to Note 21 for further details.

83  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  84

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

A reconciliation of income tax expense applicable to the profit before taxation at the statutory tax rate to the income tax 
expense at the effective tax rate of the Group is as follows:

Adjusted earnings per share is stated after the impact of the adjusting items disclosed in Note 6, excluding profit or losses on 
disposal of fixed assets and right-of-use assets and additional non-cash finance expenses and non-operational interest income 
disclosed in Note 7. This is to reflect the underlying operational performance of the Group, and exclude interest income earned 
from cash reserves held by the Group.

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

The calculation of earnings per share is based on the following earnings and number of shares.

Profit before taxation

Tax calculated at the domestic tax rate of 19% (2018: 19.00%):

Tax effects of: 

Income not subject to tax

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes

Joint venture/associate results reported net of tax

Tax deductions not recognised as an expense

Utilisation of previously unrecognised or acquired tax losses

Tax losses in the year for which no deferred tax is recognised

Difference between deferred and current tax rate

Reversal of prior year deferred tax short term timing difference

Adjustment to unrecognised deferred tax assets

Difference in foreign exchange rates

Effect of different international tax rates 

Changes in deferred tax rate

Income tax (credit)/expense

£’000

13,469

2,559

(482)

872

-

(353)

(2,224)

(269)

(246)

(2,100)

(1,549)

-

152

(295)

(3,935)

£’000

14,298

2,717

(1,036)

188

-

(246)

-

1

1,030

44

(70)

882

(84)

3,426

The aggregate current and deferred tax directly credited to equity amounted to £1,137,000 (2019: £1,352,000).

12. Earnings per share

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

Basic profit per share 

Diluted profit per share

Adjusted basic earnings per share

Adjusted diluted earnings per share 

Pence

2.450

2.382

4.417

4.294

Pence

1.628

1.584

4.470

4.351

Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the profit/loss after tax attributable to the equity holders of the Group by the 
weighted average number of shares in issue during the year. 

Diluted earnings per share is calculated by adjusting the weighted average number of shares outstanding to assume 
conversion of all potential dilutive shares, namely share options or deferred consideration payable in shares where the 
contingent conditions have been met.

In order to give a better understanding of the underlying operating performance of the Group, an adjusted earnings per share 
comparative has been included. Adjusted earnings per share is stated after adjusting the profit after tax attributable to equity 
holders of the Group for certain charges as set out in the table below. Adjusted diluted earnings per share has been calculated 
to also include the contingent shares payable as deferred consideration on acquisitions where the future conditions have not 
yet been met, as shown on the page opposite. 

Profit after 
tax

Weighted 
average 
number of 
shares

2020

Pence per 
share

Profit 
after tax 
(restated)

Pence per 
share

Weighted 
average 
number of 
shares

2019

£’000

‘000

Pence

£’000

‘000

Pence

Basic earnings per ordinary share attributable to the 
owners of the Parent

17,404

710,348

2.450

10,872

668,045

1.628

Effect of adjustments:

Amortisation of acquired intangibles

Integration costs

Cost of acquisitions

21,447

230

715

Fair value movement on contingent consideration

(1,357)

Deferred consideration and earn-outs from acquisitions

Net foreign exchange differences on business acquisitions

Interest receivable

Finance expense on contingent consideration

Finance expense on lease liabilities (IFRS 16)

Income tax expense

Effect of adjustments

Adjusted profit before tax

Tax impact after adjustments

3,511

1,070

(140)

196

418

(3,935)

22,155

39,559

(8,183)

20,872

-

249

-

3,509

-

(111)

248

468

3,426

-

-

-

3.119

28,661

-

39,533

(1.152)

(9,674)

-

-

-

4.290

-

(1.448)

Adjusted basic earnings per ordinary share

31,376

710,348

4.417

29,859

668,045

4.470

Effect of dilutive potential ordinary shares: 

Share options

Deferred consideration payable (conditions met)

Deferred consideration payable (contingent)

-

-

-

20,271

(0.123)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

18,233

(0.119)

-

-

-

-

Adjusted diluted earnings per ordinary share

31,376

730,619

4.294

29,859

686,278

4.351

Diluted earnings per ordinary share attributable to the 
owners of the parent

17,404

730,619

2.382

10,872

686,278

1.584

85  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  86

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

13.  Property, plant, equipment and right of use assets

14. Acquisitions

Right of use assets

We have outlined below a summary of the consideration paid, the fair value of acquired intangible assets, the fair value of 
other acquired assets and liabilities assumed at the acquisition date and the resulting goodwill for each acquisition, with further 
detail provided for each acquisition below.

Cost

Computer 
equipment

Fixtures and
fittings

Leasehold
improvements

£’000

£’000 

£’000

Total

£’000

Computer 
equipment

Property

Total

£’000

£’000

£’000

3,552

978

366

4,896

Cost

At 1 January 
2019

Additions on 
transition to 
IFRS 16

Additions on 
acquisitions

Additions

Foreign 
exchange 
differences

Disposals

At 31 
December 
2019

Additions on 
acquisitions

Additions

Foreign 
exchange 
differences

Disposals

At 31 
December 
2020

-

18

506

(9)

(1,477)

2,590

4

102

(9)

(485)

2,202

Accumulated depreciation

At 1 January 
2019

Charge for the 
year 

Disposals

At 31 
December 
2019

Charge for the 
year 

Disposals

At 31 
December 
2020

Net book value

At 31 
December 
2019

At 31 
December 
2020

2,145

898

(1,385)

1,658

539

(491)

1,706

932

496

-

11

55

(18)

(180)

846

-

12

29

(30)

857

478

180

(284)

374

167

-

541

472

316

-

-

126

18

(220)

290

5

-

(15)

(66)

214

129

93

(215)

7

63

(69)

1

283

213

-

29

687

(9)

(1,877)

3,726

9

114

5

(581)

3,273

2,752

1,171

(1,884)

2,039

769

(560)

2,248

1,687

1,025

-

-

11,855

11,938

266

163

94

266

163

94

-

83

-

-

-

Acquisition

Goodwill

Acquired 

customer 

relationships

Acquired 

software and IP

Acquired 

deferred tax 

liabilities

Open LMS

Patheer

JCA

eCreators

eThink

 £’000

17,118

8

537

1,554

8,173

£’000

9,868

-

166

1,092

7,628

£’000

3,393

175

164

1,385

5,057

Total

27,390

18,754

10,174

 £’000

(3,580)

(47)

(70)

(742)

(3,425)

(7,864)

Fair value 

of other 

identifiable 

assets and 

liabilities

 £’000

(4,859)

-

(22)

40

(3,055)

(7,896)

Consideration 

paid

Cash acquired

Net cash 

outflow

£’000

21,940

136

775

3,329

14,378

40,558

£’000

-

-

-

356

1,214

1,570

£’000

21,940

136

775

2,973

13,164

38,988

(123)

(123)

Open LMS 

83

12,255

12,338

-

-

-

-

83

-

60

-

60

23

-

83

23

-

36

2,219

(121)

36

2,219

(121)

(1,002)

(1,002)

13,387

13,470

-

2,441

(27)

-

2,501

(27)

2,414

2,474

2,453

(286)

2,476

(286)

4,581

4,664

9,841

9,864

8,806

8,806

On 31st March 2020, LTG completed the acquisition of the business and assets of Open LMS from Blackboard Inc for initial cash 
consideration (before some customary price adjustments) of $31.7 million (£25.6 million) funded by the Group’s existing cash 
and bank facilities. The acquisition of Open LMS adds complementary expertise to the Group’s existing proprietary software 
solutions, through the addition of expertise in the market’s leading open-source Learning Management System (LMS).

Open LMS is a Moodle-based e-learning solution, which allows clients to create, personalise and track instructions for 
students with simple online tools. Open LMS will be run as a standalone brand within LTG’s portfolio of best-in-class businesses. 
LTG supports Open LMS through its existing operational infrastructure and, under a partnership arrangement, LTG will resell 
Blackboard’s suite of products that integrate with Moodle to meet the demands of current and future customers.

The following table summarises the consideration paid for Open LMS, the fair value of assets acquired and liabilities assumed 
at the acquisition date

Consideration

Initial purchase price 

Purchase price adjustments

Total consideration 

Recognised amounts of identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed

Trade and other receivables

Trade and other payables

Deferred tax liabilities on acquisition

Intangible assets identified on acquisition

Total identifiable net assets

Goodwill

Total

Fair value

£’000

25,607

(3,667)

21,940

732

(5,591)

(3,580)

13,261

4,822

17,118

21,940

 
87  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  88

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

The purchase price adjustments were for customary working 
capital adjustments.

The goodwill arising is attributable to the acquired  
workforce, anticipated future profit from expansion 
opportunities and synergies of the business. The goodwill 
arising from the acquisition has been allocated to the Open 
LMS CGU. Fair value adjustments have been recognised for 
acquisition-related intangible assets and related deferred 
tax as well as future liabilities which are in alignment with 
accounting policies.

Acquisition-related intangible assets of £9.9 million relate 
to the valuation of the customer relationships which are 
amortised over a period of 12 years, and £3.4 million relates 
to the value of the acquired intellectual property and 
software development which is amortised over six years.

Acquisition costs of £0.4 million have been charged to the 
statement of comprehensive income in the year relating to 
the acquisition of Open LMS.

A deferred tax liability of £3.6 million in respect of the 
acquisition-related intangible assets was established on 
acquisition (refer to Note 21). 

Open LMS contributed £10.7 million of revenue for the period 
between the date of acquisition and the balance sheet date 
and £3.7 million of profit before tax attributable to equity 
holders of the parent. As a preliminary assessment, had 
the acquisition of Open LMS been completed on the first 
day of the financial year Group revenues would have been 

Consideration

Cash paid 

Total consideration 

Recognised amounts of identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed

Trade and other receivables

Trade and other payables

Deferred tax liabilities on acquisition

Intangible assets identified on acquisition

Total identifiable net assets

Goodwill

Total

approximately £2.9 million higher and group profit before tax 
attributable to equity holders of the parent would have been 
approximately £0.7 million higher

amortised over a period of four years, and £0.2 million 
relates to the value of the acquired intellectual property and 
software development which is amortised over two years.

Patheer, Inc. 

eCreators Pty Ltd

On 15 September 2020, LTG completed the acquisition of 
the business and assets of Patheer, Inc (‘Patheer’) for cash 
consideration of USD $175,000 (£136,000) funded by the 
Group’s existing cash. As part of this acquisition, the Group 
recognised goodwill of £8,000, acquired intellectual property 
of £175,000 and an associated deferred tax liability of 
£47,000 on acquisition. The acquisition of Patheer, a talent 
management software-as-a-service solution, adds to the 
Group’s existing proprietary software solutions delivered 
through PeopleFluent.

JCA Solutions

On 3 November 2020, LTG completed the acquisition of the 
business of JCA Solutions (‘JCA’), for cash consideration of 
USD $1.0 million (£0.8 million) funded by the Group’s existing 
cash and bank facilities. JCA operates in the e-learning 
interoperability standards market and has been merged with 
LTG’s Rustici Software business.

This small bolt-on acquisition further consolidates Rustici’s 
dominant market-leading position in the e-learning standards 
market, which is strategically important as companies create, 
distribute, manage and deploy more digital learning content 
from a wide array of innovative vendors and platforms.

The following table summarises the consideration paid for 
JCA, the fair value of assets acquired and liabilities assumed 
at the acquisition date.

On 1 October 2020, LTG completed the acquisition of 
the business eCreators Pty Ltd (‘eCreators’) for initial cash 
consideration of AUD $5.99 million (£3.3 million) funded by 
the Group’s existing cash and bank facilities. The acquisition 
of eCreators further strengthens the Group’s expertise in the 
market’s leading open-source Learning Management System 
(LMS), Moodle.

Consideration

Cash paid 

Total consideration 

Recognised amounts of identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed

Cash and cash equivalents

Property, plant and equipment

Trade and other receivables

Trade and other payables

Deferred tax liabilities on acquisition

Intangible assets identified on acquisition

Impact of IFRS 16 adjustments on acquisition

Total identifiable net assets

Goodwill

Total

Further performance-based payments, capped at AUD $6.5 
million (£3.6 million) are payable in cash to the eCreators 
sellers based on ambitious revenue growth targets in each 
of the years ending 31 December 2021, 2022 and 2023. 
These payments are linked to continuous employment 
so are excluded from the acquisition consideration and 
instead are recognised as an acquisition-related contingent 
consideration and earn-outs expense over the service period 
within the Statement of Comprehensive Income.

The following table summarises the consideration paid for 
eCreators, the fair value of assets acquired and liabilities 
assumed at the acquisition date.

Fair value

£’000

3,329

3,329

356

5

642

(961)

(742)

2,477

(2)

1,775

1,554

3,329

Fair value

£’000

775

775

65

(87)

(70)

330

238

537

775

The total consideration and fair value adjustments to the 
assets and liabilities assumed are provisional and are 
management’s best estimates at this time.

A deferred tax liability of £0.7 million in respect of the 
acquisition-related intangible assets was established on 
acquisition (refer to Note 21). 

The goodwill arising is attributable to the acquired  
workforce, anticipated future profit from expansion 
opportunities and synergies of the business. The goodwill 
arising from the acquisition has been allocated to the Open 
LMS CGU. Fair value adjustments have been recognised for 
acquisition-related intangible assets and related deferred 
tax as well as future liabilities which are in alignment with 
accounting policies.

Acquisition-related intangible assets of £1.1 million relate 
to the valuation of the customer relationships which are 
amortised over a period of five years, and £1.4 million 
relates to the value of the acquired intellectual property and 
software development which is amortised over six years.

Acquisition costs of £0.1 million have been charged to the 
statement of comprehensive income in the year relating to 
the acquisition of eCreators.

eCreators contributed £0.7 million of revenue for the period 
between the date of acquisition and the balance sheet 
date and £0.1 million of profit before tax attributable to 
equity holders of the parent. As a preliminary assessment, 
had the acquisition of eCreators been completed on the 
first day of the financial year Group revenues would have 
been approximately £2.1 million higher and group profit 
before tax attributable to equity holders of the parent 
would have been approximately £0.9 million higher.

eThink Education LLC 

On 4 December 2020, LTG completed the acquisition of 
the business eThink Education LLC (‘eThink’) for initial cash 
consideration of USD $20.0 million (£15.9 million) funded by 
the Group’s existing cash and bank facilities. eThink is an 
industry leader in North America in the high-growth Moodle 
open-source LMS market and will be integrated into LTG’s 

The total consideration and fair value adjustments to the 
assets and liabilities assumed are provisional and are 
management’s best estimates at this time.

The goodwill arising is attributable to the acquired workforce, 
anticipated future profit from expansion opportunities and 
synergies of the business. The goodwill arising from the 

acquisition has been allocated to the Rustici CGU. Fair value 
adjustments have been recognised for acquisition-related 
intangible assets and related deferred tax as well as future 
liabilities which are in alignment with accounting policies.

Acquisition-related intangible assets of £0.2 million relate 
to the valuation of the customer relationships which are 

89  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  90

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

Open LMS business acquired in April 2020. eThink follows the 
acquisition of eCreators in October 2020 and marks a further 
step in LTG’s strategic goal of consolidating the Moodle 
market, building further complementary expertise and 
geographical reach into Open LMS.

These payments are linked to continuous employment 
so are excluded from the acquisition consideration and 
instead are recognised as an acquisition-related contingent 
consideration and earn-outs expense over the service period 
within the Statement of Comprehensive Income.

Further performance-based payments, capped at USD 
$16.0 million (£12.0 million) are payable in cash to the eThink 
sellers based on ambitious revenue growth targets in each 
of the years ending 31 December 2021, 2022 and 2023. 

The following table summarises the consideration paid 
for eThink, the fair value of assets acquired and liabilities 
assumed at the acquisition date.

Consideration

Cash paid 

Adjustments and hold-backs

Total consideration 

Recognised amounts of identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed

Cash and cash equivalents

Property, plant and equipment

Trade and other receivables

Trade and other payables

Deferred tax liabilities on acquisition

Intangible assets identified on acquisition

Total identifiable net assets

Goodwill

Total

Fair value

£’000

15,866

(1,488)

14,378

1,214

4

741

(5,014)

(3,425)

12,685

6,205

8,173

14,378

The adjustments to the purchase price were for customary 
working capital adjustments.

The total consideration and fair value adjustments to the 
assets and liabilities assumed are provisional and are 
management’s best estimates at this time.

The goodwill arising is attributable to the acquired 
workforce, anticipated future profit from expansion 
opportunities and synergies of the business. The goodwill 
arising from the acquisition has been allocated to the 
Open LMS CGU. Fair value adjustments have been 
recognised for acquisition-related intangible assets and 
related deferred tax as well as future liabilities which are in 
alignment with accounting policies.

Acquisition-related intangible assets of £7.6 million relate 
to the valuation of the customer relationships which are 
amortised over a period of 11 years, and £5.1 million relates 
to the value of the acquired intellectual property and 
software development which is amortised over five years.

Acquisition costs of £0.2 million have been charged to the 
statement of comprehensive income in the year relating to 
the acquisition of eThink.

A deferred tax liability of £3.4 million in respect of the 
acquisition-related intangible assets was established on 
acquisition (refer to Note 21). 

eThink contributed £0.8 million of revenue for the period 
between the date of acquisition and the balance sheet 
date and £0.4 million of profit before tax attributable to 
equity holders of the parent. As a preliminary assessment, 
had the acquisition of eThink been completed on the first 
day of the financial year Group revenues would have been 
approximately £7.2 million higher and group profit before tax 
attributable to equity holders of the parent would have been 
approximately £2.3 million higher.

Details regarding the strategic decisions to acquire each of 
the above can be found in the Chairman’s statement and 
Strategic Report on pages 1 and 15 respectively.

15. Intangible assets

Cost

At 1 January 2019

Additions on acquisitions

Additions

Foreign exchange differences

At 31 December 2019 

Additions on acquisition

Additions

Foreign exchange differences

At 31 December 2020

Accumulated amortisation

At 1 January 2019

Amortisation charged in year

At 31 December 2019

Amortisation charged in year

At 31 December 2020

Carrying amount

At 31 December 2019

At 31 December 2020

Goodwil

Customer 
contracts & 
relationships 

Branding

Acquired 
software 
and IP

Internal 
Software 
Development

Total

£’000 

 £’000

£’000

£’000

 £’000

 £’000

132,258

6,341

-

(3,614)

134,985

27,390

-

(5,515)

156,860

-

-

-

-

-

134,985

156,860

92,739

1,454

-

(1,661)

92,532

18,754

-

(1,971)

109,315

23,769

15,125

38,894

15,460

54,354

53,638

54,961

2,577

38,432

-

-

(53)

2,524

-

-

(39)

2,485

670

298

968

260

1,228

1,556

1,257

2,244

-

(996)

39,680

10,174

-

(1,152)

48,702

3,254

5,449

8,703

5,727

14,430

30,977

34,272

6,689

-

5,690

(90)

272,695

10,039

5,690

(6,414)

12,289

282,010

-

6,115

(301)

56,318

6,115

(8,978)

18,103

335,465

2,544

2,433

4,977

4,192

9,169

7,312

8,934

30,237

23,305

53,542

25,639

79,181

228,468

256,284

Goodwill and acquisition-related intangible assets 
recognised have arisen from acquisitions. Refer to Note 14 
for further details of acquisitions undertaken during the year. 
Internal software development reflects the recognition of 
development work undertaken in-house.

The amortisation charge for the year of £25.6 million includes 
£21.5 million relating to acquired intangibles. Amortisation 

is included within operating expenses in the Statement of 
Comprehensive Income.

Goodwill acquired in a business combination is allocated, 
at acquisition, to the cash generating units (‘CGUs’) that are 
expected to benefit from that business combination. The 
Group has nine CGUs. The carrying amount of goodwill has 
been allocated as follows:

Goodwill

Growth rate for years 2 to 5

Post-tax discount rate

CGU

LEO*

Preloaded

Eukleia*

Rustici

PeopleFluent**

Affirmity

VectorVMS

Gomo**

Watershed

Breezy HR

Open LMS***

2020

£’000

10,496

2,180

-

13,339

42,965

18,223

36,033

-

2,322

6,104

25,198

2019

£’000

7,742

2,180

2,764

13,280

42,761

18,864

37,300

1,381*

2,404

6,309

-

156,860

134,985

2020

2019

%

4%

4%

4%

9%

7%

4%

4%

7%

12%

12%

7%

%

4%

4%

4%

9%

7%

4%

4%

7%

12%

12%

-

2020

%

12.0%

12.0%

-

15.2%

12.3%

12.3%

10.3%

-

15.2%

11.3%

15.2%

2019

%

11.0%

12.5%

12.5%

12.5%

11.5%

11.0%

10.0%

14.0%

12.5%

12.0%

-

*Eukleia has been combined with LEO in 2020 to more closely reflect how the Group derives synergies from this previous combination.

**Part of the acquired Gomo business on the acquisition of PeopleFluent has been reallocated to the PeopleFluent CGU to more closely align to how the Group derives synergies from this previous combination. 

***The Open LMS CGU includes Open LMS, eCreators and eThink.

91  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  92

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

The Group tests goodwill annually for impairment or more 
frequently if there are indications that goodwill might be 
impaired. The recoverable amounts of the CGUs are 
determined from value in use. The key assumptions for the 
value in use calculations are those regarding the discount rates 
(being the companies cost of capital), growth rates (based 
on Board approved forecasts for 2021 and estimated growth 
rates in years 2 to 5) and future EBIT margins (which are based 
on past experience). The Group monitors its pre-tax Weighted 
Average Cost of Capital and those of its competitors using 
market data. In considering the discount rates applying to 
CGUs, the Directors have considered the relative sizes, risks and 
the inter-dependencies of its CGUs. The impairment reviews 
use a discount rate adjusted for post-tax cash flows. The Group 
prepares cash flow forecasts derived from the 2021 financial 
plan approved by the Board and extrapolates revenues, net 
margins and cash flows for the following four years based on 
forecast growth rates of the CGUs. Cash flows beyond this five-
year period are also considered in assessing the need for any 
impairment provisions. The growth rates are based on internal 
growth forecasts of between 4% and 12% for the first five 
years. The terminal rate used for the value in use calculation 
thereafter is 2.5%.

In the case of the recently-acquired Open LMS CGUs, which 
comprise the Open LMS, eCreators and eThink businesses 
management has cautiously assumed average annual 
growth rates of 7% during the next five years. For most CGUs 
there is substantial headroom between the calculated value-
in-use and the net book value. In the case of VectorVMS 
CGU the headroom is more limited. Revenues declined 
c.7% in 2020 and are anticipated to decline by c.7% in 2021 
primarily as a result of multi-year licences terminated prior to 
acquisition and the impact of COVID-19 on contingent labour 
utilisation in 2020. Management has assumed the business 
will grow by an average rate of 4% over the subsequent five 
years on the basis that it is anticipated that the contingent 
labour market in the US will expand from H2 2021 as 
economies recover following the impact of COVID-19 and 
there will be a continued shift to outsourced digital provision 
of these services.

Management has assessed that if there was a reasonably 
possible change to the discount rate assumption for VectorVMS 
that could give rise to an impairment in the next 12 months. An 
impairment would result from any increase in discount rate or 
reduction in growth rate. If the discount rate were to increase 
to 11.3% an impairment of £5.5 million would be indicated. If 
the growth rate for years 2 to 5 were to be reduced to 0% an 
impairment of £6.1 million would be indicated.

Management does not consider that any other reasonably 
possible changes in the assumptions for other CGUs would 
result in an impairment.

As disclosed in Note 2, Accounting policies, the forecast 
cash flows used within the impairment model are based on 
assumptions which are sources of estimation uncertainty and it 
is possible that significant changes to these assumptions could 
lead to an impairment of goodwill and acquired intangibles. 
Given the uncertainty surrounding the impact of COVID-19 
on the Group’s operations and on the global economy, 
management has considered a range of sensitivities on each 
of the key assumptions, with other variables held constant. 
The sensitivities which were each assessed in isolation include; 
applying a 10% reduction in the revenue assumption in 
the next financial year from the base cash flow projections, 
representing a slower recovery from the impact of COVID-19; 
increases in the discount rate by 1% and reductions in the 
long-term growth rates to 0%. Under these severe scenarios, 
the estimated recoverable amount of goodwill and acquired 
intangibles still exceeded the carrying value of all CGUs except 
VectorVMS which we have discussed above.

The sensitivity analysis showed that no reasonably possible 
change in assumptions would lead to an impairment.

Customer contracts, relationships, branding and Acquired IP

TThese intangible assets include the Group’s aggregate 
amounts spent on the acquisition of industry-specific 
knowledge, software technology, branding and customer 
relationships. These assets arose from acquisition as part of 
business combinations.

The fair value of these assets is determined by discounting 
estimated future net cash flows generated by the asset where 
no active market for the assets exists. 

The cost of these intangible assets is amortised over the 
estimated useful life of each separate asset of between two 
and 12 years. 

Internal software development 

Internal software development costs principally comprise 
expenditure incurred on major software development 
projects and the production of generic e-learning content 
where it is reasonably anticipated that the costs will be 
recovered through future commercial activity.

Capitalised development costs are amortised over the 
estimated useful life of between two and ten years.

16. Investments accounted for using the equity method 

Joint ventures

The joint venture has share capital consisting solely of ordinary shares, which are held directly by the Group. The nature of the 
investment at 31 December 2019 and 31 December 2020 is listed below.

Name of entity

Country of Registration or 
Incorporation

Principal activity

Percentage of ordinary shares  
held by Group

LEO Brasil Tecnologia
Educacional Ltda  
(formerly Epic Brasil Tecnologia
Educacional Ltda)

Brazil

Bespoke e-learning

38%

On 27 August 2018, the Group entered into a debt for equity 
swap agreement whereby Epic Group Limited and the 
other 50% investor agreed to convert debts due from Leo 
Brasil Tecnologia Educacional Ltda (‘LEO Brazil’) to equity in 
the proportion to amounts owed at that date. Epic Group 
Limited had a total of $268,000 (equivalent to approximately 
£200,000) converted to equity and, following such 
conversion, its shareholding was reduced from 50% to 38%. 
As all amounts receivable from the investee had been written 
off by the Group, there was no financial impact, either on the 
carrying value of the investment or the results for the year. 

LEO Brazil is a private company and there is no quoted 
market price available for its shares.

The accounting reference date of LEO Brazil is coterminous 
with that of the Company.

There are no contingent liabilities or commitments relating to 
the Group’s interest in LEO Brazil.

Where the Group’s share of losses in LEO Brazil exceeds its 
interests in the company, the Group does not recognise 
further losses as it has no further obligation to make 
payments on behalf of the company. 

No further disclosures are provided on the grounds  
of materiality.

17. Trade receivables

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

Trade receivables

Allowance for impairment losses

Impairment losses:

At 1 January

Additions on acquisition

Additions/(disposals)

Foreign exchange

At 31 December

£’000

34,479

(1,495)

32,984

904

43

576

(28)

1,495

£’000

29,815

(904)

28,911

1,332

-

(418)

(10)

904

The Group’s normal trade credit term is 30 days. Other credit terms are assessed and approved on a case-by-case basis.

The fair value of trade receivables approximates their carrying amount, as the impact of discounting is not significant. No interest 
has been charged to date on overdue receivables. 

Disclosure of the expected credit losses tables are not included as they are not material.

93  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  94

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

18. Other receivables and prepayments

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

21. Deferred tax assets/(liabilities) 

The deferred tax balances relate to temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their 
carrying amounts in the Financial Statements. Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that the future 
taxable profits will allow the deferred tax assets to be recovered. 

Current assets

Sundry receivables

Prepayments 

Non-current assets

Sundry receivables

Sundry receivables includes rent deposits and other sundry receivables.

£’000

371

3,848

4,219

76

76

£’000

326

2,152

2,478

120

120

19. Amount recoverable on contracts

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

Deferred tax charged directly to equity

Current assets

Contract assets

Non-current assets

Contract assets

£’000

3,879

3,879

624

624

£’000

4,699

4,699

713

713

Disclosure of the expected credit losses tables are not included as they are not material.

Exercise of share options, charged directly to the income statement

Exchange rate differences, charged directly to OCI

Changes in tax rate, credited to the income statement

At 31 December 2019

Deferred tax (charge)/credit directly to the income statement

Deferred tax charged directly to equity

Exercise of share options , charged directly to the income statement

Exchange rate differences, charged directly to OCI

Changes in tax rate, credited to the income statement

Deferred tax assets

Share options

Tax losses

At 1 January 2019

Restatement due to IFRS 15 application change (Note 4)

Acquisition of subsidiaries

Deferred tax (charge)/credit directly to the income statement

£’000

730

-

-

441

1,352

(183)

-

-

2,340

870

646

(66)

(36)

240

£’000

1,703

-

134

(202)

-

-

-

-

1,635

557

-

-

(19)

66

Short-term
timing 
differences 
(Restated)

£’000

425

(546)

-

362

-

(1)

-

-

240

1,171

-

-

(32)

2

Total

£’000

2,858

(546)

134

601

1,352

(184)

-

-

4,215

2,598

646

(66)

(87)

308

At 31 December 2020

3,994

2,239

1,381

7,614

20. Cash and cash equivalents, restricted cash and short-term deposits
For the purpose of the statement of cash flows, cash and cash equivalents comprise cash held by the Group and short-term 
bank deposits with an original maturity of three months or less:

Deferred tax liabilities

Cash and bank balances

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

At 1 January 2019

£’000

88,614

£’000

42,032

Deferred tax on acquired intangibles and via acquisition

Deferred tax credit/(charge) directly to the income statement

Exchange rate differences, charged directly to OCI

Intangibles

£’000

(25,451)

(961)

4,772

657

Accelerated tax
depreciation

Short-term timing
differences

£’000

(848)

-

(1,180)

-

£’000

-

-

(2,246)

-

Total

£’000

(26,299)

(961)

1,346

657

Restricted cash balances comprise amounts held on behalf of third parties and employees as part of the Employee Stock 
Purchase Plan (‘ESPP’):

Restricted cash

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

£’000

682

£’000

330

At 31 December 2019

(20,983)

(2,028)

(2,246)

(25,257)

Deferred tax on acquired intangibles and via acquisition

Deferred tax credit/(charge) directly to the income statement

Exchange rate differences, charged directly to OCI

Changes in tax rate, charged to the income statement

(7,864)

4,533

1,142

-

-

(195)

92

(11)

-

1,857

86

-

(7,864)

6,195

1,320

(11)

At 31 December 2020

(23,172)

(2,142)

(303)

(25,617)

The UK corporation tax rate is 19% effective from 1 April 2017. 
In the Spring Budget 2020, the UK Government announced 
that from 1 April 2020 the corporation tax rate would remain 
at 19% (rather than reducing to 17%, as previously enacted). 
This new law was substantively enacted on 17 March 2020, 
and the impact of this change is less than £0.5 million. The US 
corporation tax rate is 26%.

The Group has recognised £2.2 million (2019: £1.6 million) of 
deferred tax assets relating to carried forward tax losses. These 
losses have been recognised as it is probable that future 
taxable profits will allow these deferred tax assets to  
be recovered. The Group has performed a continuing 
evaluation of its deferred tax asset valuation allowance on 
an annual basis to estimate whether sufficient future taxable 
income will be generated to permit use of the existing 
deferred tax assets. 

95  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  96

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

Unrecognised deferred tax assets, relating primarily to trading losses carried forward arising in the US, total £34.0 million (2019: 
£48.0 million), and have not been recognised due to uncertainty over the timing and extent of future taxable profits. The losses 
can be carried forward indefinitely and have no expiry date. 

22. Trade and other payables

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

Trade payables

Contract liabilities

Tax and social security

Contingent consideration

Acquisition-related contingent consideration and earn-outs

Accruals

£’000

2,335

51,679

1,687

493

1,205

10,616

68,015

£’000

1,508

49,219

603

-

3,230

8,231

62,791

The acquisition-related contingent consideration and earn-outs balance in 2020 and 2019 relates partly to the acquisition of 
Watershed Systems Inc. and partly to the acquisition of BreezyHR Inc. This is treated as post-combination remuneration and is 
accrued over the service period. The contingent consideration balance in 2020 relates wholly to the acquisition of Watershed 
Systems Inc and is a financial instrument held at fair value within the scope of IFRS 9 repayable during 2021 and 2022.

The contract liabilities balance relates mainly to the Group’s right to access licences, support and maintenance and hosting 
contracts which are recognised over the contract term as the customer receives and consumes the benefits of the service. All 
of the current liability contract liabilities balance at 31 December 2019 was recognised as revenue in 2020 and the currently 
contract liabilities deferred income balance at 31 December 2020 is expected to be recognised as revenue in 2021.

The Group acquired £9.9 million of contract liabilities balances as part of the business acquisitions discussed in Note 14.  
These balances were partly recognised as revenue in 2020 with the remaining balance being expected to be recognised  
as revenue in 2021.

23. Other long-term liabilities

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019 
(Restated)

31 Dec 2018 
(Restated)

Acquisition-related contingent consideration and earn-outs

Contingent consideration

Contract liabilities

Other long-term liabilities

Total

£’000

1,597

662

4,778

598

7,635

£’000

165

2,542

3,349

287

6,343

£’000

20

2,378

4,503

7

6,908

The acquisition-related contingent consideration and earn-outs balance in 2020 relates to the acquisitions of Watershed 
Systems Inc., BreezyHR Inc., eCreators Pty Limited and eThink Education LLC. The acquisition-related deferred consideration 
and earn-outs balance in 2019 relates to the acquisitions of Watershed Systems Inc. and BreezyHR Inc. This is treated as post-
combination remuneration and is accrued over the service period. 

The contingent consideration relates wholly to the acquisition of Watershed Systems Inc and is a financial instrument held at fair 
value within the scope of IFRS 9 repayable during 2021 and 2022.

The non-current contract liabilities balance relates mainly to the Group’s right to access licences, support and maintenance 
and hosting contracts which are recognised over the contract term as the customer receives and consumes the benefits of the 
service. The non-current deferred revenue balance at 31 December 2020 is expected to be recognised during 2022 and 2023.

24. Borrowings

On the acquisition of PeopleFluent Holdings Corp. in 2018 the 
existing debt facility with Silicon Valley Bank (‘SVB’) was repaid 
and a new debt facility with SVB and Barclays was entered into 
for a total of $63.0 million. 

This is made up of a committed $42.0 million term loan (£30.9 
million at the year-end exchange rate) and a committed 
$21.0 million multicurrency revolving credit facility (£15.5 
million at the year-end exchange rate), both available to 
the Group for five years. The facility attracts variable interest 
based on LIBOR for the currency of the loan plus a margin of 
between 1.6% and 2.1%, based on the Group’s leverage.

The term loan is repayable with quarterly instalments of 
$2.1 million (c £1.7 million) with the balance repayable 
on the expiry of the loan in April 2023. As a result of the 
lenders agreeing to postpone the term loan repayments in 
the second half of 2020; these term loan repayments will 
increase to $2.5 million (c £1.9 million) from Q1 2021 until the 
termination of the loan in 2023.

The bank loan is secured by a fixed and floating charge  
over the assets of the Group and is subject to various  
financial covenants that are tested quarterly.

The financial covenants are that the Group must ensure 
that its cash flow cover ratio is at least 1.1 times and its 
leverage ratio does not exceed 2.75. The cash flow cover 
and leverage ratio is not a statutory measure and so its basis 
and composition may differ from other leverage measures 
published by other companies.

The Group was compliant with all financial covenants 
throughout the year and as at 31 December 2020, the Group’s 
cash flow cover was 4.09 and its leverage ratio was -1.56.

The lease liabilities have arisen on adoption of IFRS 16 and 
are secured by the related underlying assets. See Note 33 for 
the undiscounted maturity analysis of lease liabilities at 31 
December 2020. 

Current interest-bearing loans and borrowings

Non-current interest-bearing loans and borrowings

Current lease liabilities

Non-current lease liabilities

Total

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

£’000

7,339

11,073

2,536

7,722

£’000

6,344

31,858

2,880

9,077

28,670

50,159

Net debt / cash reconciliation
Net debt / cash, which excludes lease liabilities, can be analysed as follows:

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

Cash and cash equivalents

Short-term deposits

Borrowings:

- Revolving credit facility

- Term loan

Total

£’000

88,614

-

-

(18,412)

70,202

£’000

42,032

-

(16,011)

(22,191)

3,830

97  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  98

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

25. Lease liabilities

31 Dec 2018

This note provides information for leases where the group is a lessee.

At 1 January

Additions

Additions on acquisitions

Interest expense

Lease payments

Disposals

Foreign exchange movements

At 31 December 

2020

£’000

11,957

2,219

21

418

(3,317)

(889)

(151)

10,258

2019

£’000

14,465

-

275

468

(3,275)

-

24

11,957

Additional profit or loss and cash flow information

31 Dec 2018

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

Income from subleasing office premises

Total cash outflow in respect of leases in the year

Expense related to short term leases not accounted for under IFRS 16

Additions to right of use assets

£’000

230

(3,317)

(81)

2,255

£’000

210

(3,275)

(77)

429

The Group’s accounting policy for leases is set out in Note 2. Details of Income statement charges are set out in Note 8. The 
right-of-use asset categories on which depreciation is incurred are presented in Note 13. Interest expense incurred on lease 
liabilities is presented in Note 7. The maturity of undiscounted future lease liabilities are set out in Note 33.

26. Provisions

At 1 January – brought forward

Released to the income statement

Paid in the year

Addition 

Total

31 Dec 2018

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

Proceeds from issuance of shares from equity placing

£’000

853

(152)

-

-

701

£’000

301

-

(50)

602

853

Associated placing costs, paid from proceeds

Proceeds from issuance of shares from share option 
scheme

Total proceeds disclosed in the consolidated 
statement of cash flows

Breezy earn-out consideration settled via a share issue

Total issue of shares disclosed in the consolidated 
statement of changes in equity

Provisions primarily relate to regulatory and legal costs that management consider are likely to be incurred as a result of historic 
events in the ordinary course of business. These include the Group’s share of dilapidation costs in respect of costs to be incurred 
at the end of property leases. 

27. Share capital
Shares were issued during the year as follows:

Shares were issued during the year as follows:

Number of 
shares

Share capital

Share premium

£’000

£’000

Merger 
reserve

£’000

Total

£’000

At 1 January 2020

669,120,088

2,509

148,216

31,983

182,708

Shares issued on the exercise of options

Shares issued as part of equity placing

3,373,089

64,395,648

Breezy earn-out consideration settled via a share issue

2,408,585

13

241

90

980

79,347

3,128

-

-

-

993

79,588

3,218

At 31 December 2020

739,297,410

2,853

231,671

31,983

266,507

The par value of all shares is £0.00375. All shares in issue were allotted, called up and fully paid.

The holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive dividends as declared from time to time and are entitled to one vote per 
share at the meetings of the Company.

On 3 March 2015 the Group incorporated Learning Technologies Group (Trustee) Limited, a wholly owned subsidiary of the 
Company. The purpose of the company is to act as an Employee Benefit Trust (‘EBT’) for the benefit of current and previous 
employees of the Group. At 31 December 2020 the EBT holds 404,340 (2019: 404,340) ordinary shares in the Company. These 
shares are held in treasury. 

A total of 3,373,089 ordinary shares were issued during the course of the year as a result of the exercise of employee share options. 

The share issue amounts included in the consolidated statement of changes in equity and statement of cash flows, can be 
reconciled as follows.

Share capital

Share premium

31 Dec 2020

£’000

241

-

13

254

90

344

£’000

81,541

(2,194)

980

80,327

3,128

83,455

Total

£’000

81,782

(2,194)

993

80,581

3,218

83,799

 
99  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  100

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

28. Share-based payment transactions

The Group operates an Approved and Unapproved share 
option plan and a number of contributory share save 
schemes. The Group’s share-based payment arrangements 
are summarised below.

(a) Share option plans

As part of its strategy for executive and key employee 
remuneration, on Admission to AIM the Company 
established a Share Option Scheme under which share 
options may be granted to officers and employees or 
members of the Group. Under the rules of the Share Option 
Scheme, the Company may grant EMI options and/

or unapproved options. Prior to the reverse takeover by 
LTG in November 2013, Epic Group Limited ran their own 
share option scheme. Option holders in this plan either 
exercised their options or modified them into share options 
in the new scheme, such that they had a neutral effect 
on the option holders immediately before and after the 
amendment of the options. 

There is no limit on the number of shares, or the percentage 
of issued share capital, that can be used by the Company 
for share options. The rules of the Share Option Scheme 
do not comply with the ABI’s guidelines on policies and 
practices in respect of executive remuneration. 

Approved share option plan - Enterprise 
Management Incentive (‘EMI’):

2020

2019

Number of options 

Weighted average  
exercise price

pence

Number of 
options 

Weighted average 
exercise price

pence

Approved share option plan - Enterprise Management Incentive (‘EMI’):

At 1 January

Options granted by Company

Forfeited

Exercised during the year

At 31 December

3,259,044

17.247

3,939,044

17.794

-

-

(2,106,499)

1,152,545

-

-

20.578

12.838

-

-

(680,000)

3,259,044

-

-

20.415

17.247

EMI options are granted to employees of the Group and vesting criteria are subject to challenging performance targets such 
as share price growth or other criteria such as annual sales. Except where agreed by the Board, options will lapse if an option 
holder ceases to be an employee of the Group. All EMI options are settled by equity. 

Unapproved share option plan:

2020

2019

Unapproved share option plan:

At 1 January

Granted by Company

Forfeited

Exercised during the year

At 31 December

Number of options 

Weighted average 
exercise price

28,826,568

4,448,998

(1,609,901)

(450,000)

31,215,665

pence

76.116

114.976

56.277

50.328

83.099

Number of 
options 

22,059,901

12,833,334

(4,766,667)

(1,300,000)

28,826,568

Weighted average 
exercise price

pence

70.441

79.913

71.427

34.500

76.116

Unapproved options are granted to employees of the Group and vesting criteria are subject to challenging performance 
targets such as revenue and EBIT growth or other criteria such as annual sales. Except where agreed by the Board, options 
will lapse if an option holder ceases to be an employee of the Group. All unapproved options are settled by equity.

In November 2020, given the impact of COVID-19 on performance targets in 2020, the Group and certain option holders 
entered into Deeds of Variation to effectively amend the vesting period of options vesting in 2020 to the calendar year that 
immediately follows the final calendar year of each respective Option Agreement. This modification did not change the fair 
value of the options held by each option holder and as such, the share-based payment charged recognised in the income 
statement continues to be recognised at the grant date fair value of each option over the new vesting period agreed with 
each respective option holder. The Executive Directors did not enter into a Deed of Variation over their LTIPs.

(b) Sharesave option scheme

In the UK the Company established the 2016, 2017, 2018, 
2019 and 2020 Learning Technologies Group plc Sharesave 
Scheme in April 2016, April 2017, April 2018, April 2019 and 
October 2020 respectively. In October 2020 the Company 
established a Colombian share save scheme. The schemes 
enables UK and Colombian permanent employees of 
the Group to buy shares in the Company at a discount on 
maturity of a three-year savings contract, unless they are 
made redundant, in which case they can exercise their 
options, at the time of redundancy. The savings are held 

with the Yorkshire Building Society and Alianza Fiduciaria S.A 
for UK and Colombian employees respectively.

Each member of the scheme may save a fixed amount of 
up to £500 ($COL 2,500,000) per month for three years at 
the end of which period, each employee may buy shares 
at a fixed price of 29.6, 40.8, 68.4, 55.0 and 94.7 pence 
per share respectively (the ‘Option Price’), being a discount 
of 20% on the share price as of 26 April 2016, 20 April 2017, 
11 April 2019, 9 April 2020 and 9 October 2020 respectively. 
At the end of three years, an employee may either opt to 
buy shares at the Option Price or take the savings in cash

Sharesave Option Scheme:

At 1 January

Granted by Company

Forfeited

Exercised during the year

At 31 December

2020

2019

Number of options 

Weighted average 
exercise price

Number of options 

Weighted average 
exercise price

2,298,946

867,809

(284,085)

(816,590)

2,066,080

pence

53.993

94.700

60.297

40.800

75.438

2,297,473

764,189

(514,966)

(247,750)

2,298,946

pence

53.844

51.000

66.044

30.973

53.993

(c) Employee stock purchase plan

The Company established the Learning Technologies 
Group plc U.S. and Canada 2019 and 2020 Employee 
Stock Purchase Plan (ESPP) in May 2019 and November 
2020 respectively. The scheme enables US and Canadian 
permanent employees of the Group to buy shares in the 
Company at a discount on maturity of a two-year savings 
contract. The savings are held by Learning Technologies 
Group Inc. and treated as restricted cash.

Each member of the scheme may save a fixed amount 
each month over the two-year period, at the end of 
which each employee may buy shares at a fixed price 
of 70.6 and 102.0 pence per share (the ‘Option Price’), 
being a discount of 15% on the share price as of 17 
May 2020 and 2 November 2020. No participant may 
purchase more than 40,000 shares during an offering 
period. At the end of two years, a participant’s option to 
purchase shares will be exercised automatically on the 
purchase date provided that the fair market value of the 
shares is greater than the purchase price, otherwise the 
accumulated payroll deductions held on behalf of a 
participant will be repaid promptly.

2020

2019

Number of options 

Weighted average 
exercise price

Number of options 

Weighted average 
exercise price

Employee Stock Purchase Plan:

At 1 January

Granted by Company

Forfeited

Exercised during the year

At 31 December

942,621

880,972

(114,321)

-

1,709,272

pence

70.550

102.000

70.550

-

86.760

-

1,043,094

(100,473)

-

942,621

pence

-

70.550

70.550

-

70.550

101  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  102

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

(d) Employee share ownership plan

The Company established the LTG Peak Performance Trust 
(‘PPT’) in December 2020. The scheme enables Australian 
permanent employees of the Group to buy shares in the 
Company at a discount on maturity of a one-year savings 
contract, with an additional two-year savings contract 
available upon remaining in the scheme each year. The 
savings are held by Succession Plus Australia.

Each member of the scheme may save AUD416.67 each 
month over the one-year period, at the end of which each 
employee may buy shares at a discount of 15% on the 
share price at the time of acquisition. At the end of the 
one year, a participant’s option to purchase shares will be 
exercised automatically on the purchase date. In years 
two and three, an increased monthly purchase limit of 
AUD625.00 and AUD716.67 is available to employees who 
have remained in the scheme in the prior years.

2020

2019

Number of options 

Weighted average 
exercise price

Number of options 

pence

-

139.456

-

-

-

16,320

-

-

16,320

139.456

-

-

-

-

-

Weighted average 
exercise price

pence

-

-

-

-

-

Employee Share Ownership Plan

At 1 January

Granted by Company

Forfeited

Exercised during the year

At 31 December

At 31 December 2020, options granted to subscribe for ordinary shares of the Company, and the valuation criteria,  
are as follows:

Number of shares under option

Date of grant

Approved 
Scheme

Unapproved 
scheme

Sharesave 
Scheme

Exercise Price

Jun 2013

Mar 2014

Nov 2014

Aug 2016

Aug 2016

Mar 2017

Mar 2017

Mar 2017

Apr 2017

Apr 2017

May 2017

May 2017

May 2017

May 2017

May 2017

May 2017

May 2017

Jun 2017

Jun 2017

Dec 2017

343,945

183,600

625,000

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

850,000

200,000

150,000

200,000

200,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

225,000

1,000,000

125,000

50,000

25,000

50,000

125,000

600,000

200,000

400,000

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Pence

2.718

15.500

17.625

28.500

28.500

42.500

42.500

42.500

37.500

37.500

37.500

37.500

37.500

37.500

37.500

37.500

37.500

42.500

42.500

60.114

Remaining 
vesting  
period

Fair value of 
options

Life

Volatility

Pence

Years

Percent

-

-

-

-

Dec 2024

-

-

Jan 2021

-

-

-

Jan 2021

Mar 2021

Apr 2021

Sep 2021

Oct 2021

Dec 2021

-

Dec 2024

-

11.96

8.76

9.96

16.11

16.11

19.63

19.63

19.63

5.2

13.86

29.63

29.63

29.63

29.63

29.63

29.63

29.63

20.46

20.46

30.10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

45%

45%

45%

45%

45%

34%

34%

34%

34%

34%

34%

34%

34%

34%

34%

34%

34%

36%

36%

38%

Number of shares under option

Date of grant

Approved 
Scheme

Unapproved 
scheme

Sharesave 
Scheme

Exercise Price

Dec 2017

Dec 2017

Apr 2018

Jul 2018

Jul 2018

Jul 2018

Aug 2018

Aug 2018

Aug 2018

Aug 2018

Apr 2019

Apr 2019

Apr 2019

Apr 2019

Apr 2019

Apr 2019

Apr 2019

Jul 2019

Jul 2019

Jul 2019

Jul 2019

Jul 2019

Nov 2019

Nov 2019

Nov 2019

Dec 2019

Dec 2019

Dec 2019

Apr-2020

Apr-2020

Apr-2020

Apr-2020

Apr-2020

Jul-2020

Oct-2020

Oct-2020

Oct-2020

Oct-2020

Oct-2020

Oct-2020

Oct-2020

Oct-2020

Nov-2020

Nov-2020

Dec-2020

300,000

300,000

-

-

-

598,120

425,000

275,000

300,000

1,800,000

2,200,000

2,000,000

2,000,000

-

-

2,041,666

450,000

2,041,667

2,041,667

1,591,667

333,333

166,667

166,667

166,667

166,666

400,000

200,000

200,000

400,000

200,000

200,000

150,998

775,000

775,000

775,000

775,000

198,000

150,000

150,000

150,000

150,000

100,000

100,000

100,000

100,000

-

-

-

607,753

828,300

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

860,207

880,972

16,320

Pence

60.114

60.114

68.400

102.000

102.000

102.000

103.490

103.490

103.490

103.490

55.100

70.550

75.200

75.200

75.200

75.200

75.200

75.200

75.200

75.200

75.200

75.200

113.000

113.000

113.000

113.000

113.000

113.000

115.000

115.000

115.000

115.000

115.000

115.000

114.300

114.300

114.300

114.300

114.300

114.300

114.300

114.300

94.7000

102.000

139.456

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Totals

1,152,545

31,215,665

3,791,672

Remaining 
vesting  
period

Fair value of 
options

Life

Volatility

Pence

Years

Percent

Jan 2022

Jan 2023

May 2021

-

Jan 2022

Jan 2023

Jan 2021

Jan 2023

Jan 2024

Jan 2025

-

-

Jan 2021

Jan 2022

Jan 2023

Jan 2024

Jan 2025

-

Feb 2021

Jul 2021

Feb 2022

Jul 2022

Jan 2023

Jan 2024

Jan 2025

Jan 2023

Jan 2024

Jan 2025

Apr-21

Jan-23

Jan-24

Jan-25

Jan-26

Jan-23

Jan-23

Jan-24

Jan-25

Jan-26

Jan-23

Jan-24

Jan-25

Jan-26

Nov-23

Nov-22

Dec-21

30.10

30.10

32.15

52.61

52.61

52.61

56.14

56.14

56.14

56.14

35.12

44.37

55.64

55.64

55.64

55.64

55.64

92.09

92.09

92.09

92.09

92.09

75.10

75.10

75.10

88.04

88.04

88.04

74.82

74.82

74.82

74.82

74.82

70.99

62.03

62.03

62.03

62.03

62.03

62.03

62.03

62.03

50.97

41.89

48.89

10

10

3

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

3

2

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

3

2

1

38%

38%

40%

38%

38%

38%

40%

40%

40%

40%

66%

68%

68%

68%

68%

68%

68%

71%

71%

71%

71%

71%

57%

57%

57%

52%

52%

52%

56%

56%

56%

56%

56%

55%

52%

52%

52%

52%

52%

52%

52%

52%

52%

52%

52%

103  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  104

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

An option-holder has no voting or dividend rights in the 
Company before the exercise of a Share option.

The weighted average share price at grant date of options 
granted during the year in the Unapproved Share Option 
Scheme at grant date was £1.223 (2019: £0.841) and the 
estimated fair value of each share option granted was 
£0.718 (2019: £0.617).

The weighted average share price at grant date of the 
Sharesave Scheme was £1.216 (2019: £0.688) and the 
estimated fair value of each share option was £0.510 
(2019: £0.351). It is assumed that 50% of members will 
remain in the Group after three years.

The weighted average share price at grant date of the 
ESPP was £1.216 (2019: £0.830) and the estimated fair 
value of each share option was £0.419 (2019: 0.444). It is 
assumed that 50% of members will remain in the Group 
after two years.

The weighted average share price at grant date of the PPT 
was £1.700 (2019: £Nil) and the estimated fair value of each 
share option was £0.489 (2019: £Nil). It is assumed that 50% 
of members will remain in the Group after one year.

A 0.26% - 0.29% (2019: 1.78%) risk-free interest rate has 
been assumed for all three schemes. The estimated fair 
value was calculated by applying a Black-Scholes option 

pricing model. The expected volatility of the Group’s 
share price is calculated based on an assumption of 
historical volatility.

The option life factored into the model for EMI and 
Unapproved options is 10 years, for Sharesave scheme 
options three years, for ESPP options two years and for PPT 
options one year.

The expense and equity reserve arising from share-based 
payment transactions recognised in the year ended 
31 December 2020 was £3,340,000 (year ended 31 
December 2019: £3,111,000).

The weighted average share price at the date of exercise 
of options under the EMI Share Option Scheme was 
£1.339 (2019:£1.016).

The weighted average share price at the date of exercise 
of options under the Unapproved Share Option Scheme 
was £1.433 (2019: £0.860).

The weighted average share price at the date of exercise 
of options under the Sharesave Scheme was £1.356 
(2019: £1.008)

The number of options that are exercisable at 31 
December 2020 is 6,335,878 (2019: 7,468,945).

29. Subsidiaries of the Group

The subsidiaries of the Group, all of which are private companies limited by shares, as at 31 December 2020, are as follows:

Company

Country of Registration or 
Incorporation

Registered Office

Principal Activity

Percentage of ordinary 
shares held by Company

Held directly by Learning Technologies Group Plc:

Learning Technologies Group 

Holdings (UK) Limited (previously 

England and Wales

52 Old Steine, Brighton, BN1 1NH, 

England

Holding company

named Epic Group Limited)

Line Communications Holdings 

Limited

Learning Technologies Group 

(Trustee) Limited

Learning Technologies Group 

Holdings Limited (previously 

named NetDimensions Holdings 

(UK) Limited)

Watershed Systems, Inc.

Learning Technologies 

Acquisition Corp

England and Wales

England and Wales

52 Old Steine, Brighton, BN1 1NH, 

England

52 Old Steine, Brighton, BN1 1NH, 

England

Dormant

Employee Benefit Trust

England and Wales

52 Old Steine, Brighton, BN1 1NH, 

England

Holding company

USA

USA

c/o National Registered Agents 

Inc. 160 Greentree Dr STE 101, 

Dover, Kent, DE, 19904

Corporation Service Company, 

SaaS Learning Analytics 

Platform

251 Little Falls Drive, Wilmington, 

Holding company

New Castle, DE 19808

Held indirectly by Learning Technologies Group Plc:

Preloaded Limited

England and Wales

Leo Learning Inc

USA

Learning Technologies Group 

(UK) Limited (previously named 

England and Wales

Leo Learning Limited)

Eukleia Training Limited

England and Wales

Rustici Software LLC

USA

Learning Technologies Group 

(Hong Kong) Limited (previously 

Hong Kong

known as NetDimensions Limited) 

NetDimensions, Inc.

USA

NetDimensions (UK) Limited

England and Wales

NetDimensions (China) Limited

Hong Kong

52 Old Steine, Brighton, BN1 1NH, 

England

11 Broadway, Suite 466, New 

York, New York, 10004, USA

Educational Games

Bespoke e-learning

52 Old Steine, Brighton, BN1 1NH, 

England

Bespoke e-learning

52 Old Steine, Brighton, BN1 1NH, 

England

210 Gothic CT # 100, Franklin, TN 

37067-8256, USA

16F/Kingsfield Centre, 18 Shell 

Street, North Point, Hong Kong 

SAR

c/o The Corporation Trust 

Bespoke e-learning

e-learning interoperability

e-learning software licencing 

and services

Company (Delaware), 1209 

e-learning software licencing 

Orange Street, New Castle, DE 

and services

19801, USA

52 Old Steine, Brighton, BN1 1NH, 

e-learning software licencing 

England

and services

16F/Kingsfield Centre, 18 Shell 

Street, North Point, Hong Kong 

SAR

e-learning software licencing 

and services

Learning Technologies Group 

Pty Limited (previously named 

NetDimensions (Australia) Pty 

Limited)

Australia

Level 4, 91 William Street, 

e-learning software licencing 

Melbourne VIC 3000

and services

NetDimensions Asia Limited

Hong Kong/Philippines

Street, North Point, Hong Kong 

16F/Kingsfield Centre, 18 Shell 

SAR

e-learning software licencing 

and services

Learning Technologies Group 

GmbH (previously known as 

NetDimensions Germany GmbH) 

Germany

Dieningholt 9, 59387 Ascheberg, 

e-learning software licencing 

Germany

and services

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

105  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  106

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

Company

Country of Registration or 
Incorporation

Registered Office

Principal Activity

Percentage of ordinary 
shares held by Company

E-Creators Pty Ltd.

Australia

Level 3, 210 Albert Road South 

SaaS learning management 

Melbourne, VIC 3004

system

Held indirectly by Learning Technologies Group Plc:

NetDimensions (Holdings) Limited

Cayman Islands

Gomo Learning Limited

England and Wales

Line Communications Group 

Limited

England and Wales

Maples Corporate Services 

Limited, PO Box 309, Ugland 

House, Grand Catman, KY1-1104, 

Cayman Islands

52 Old Steine, Brighton, BN1 1NH, 

England

52 Old Steine, Brighton, BN1 1NH, 

England

Corporation Service Company, 

Dormant

Mobile e-learning

Dormant

PeopleFluent Holdings Corp.

USA

251 Little Falls Drive, Wilmington, 

Holding company

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

USA

New Castle, DE 19808

The Corporation Trust Company, 

Corporation Trust Centre, 1209 

Orange Street, Wilmington, New 

Castle DE 19801

Integrated talent 

management and learning 

100%

solutions

Canada

Longueuil Québec J4K5G4, 

management and learning 

100%

554-1111 RUE St-Charles O, 

Integrated talent 

Canada

solutions

Learning Technologies Group 

Inc. (previously known as 

PeopleFluent Inc)

Learning Technologies Group 

(Canada) Inc (previously known 

as Strategia Communications 

Inc) 

Bedford HCIT Holdings Corp

Gomo Learning Inc. (previously 

named KZO Innovations Inc)

USA

USA

PeopleClick Limited

England and Wales

PeopleFluent Limited

England and Wales

Learning Technologies Group 

Brasil Servicos de Tecnologia 

Ltda

Brazil

251 Little Falls Drive, Wilmington, 

Video distribution software

The Corporation Trust Company, 

Corporation Trust Centre, 1209 

Orange Street, Wilmington, New 

Castle DE 19801

Corporation Service Company, 

New Castle, DE 19808

52 Old Steine, Brighton, BN1 1NH, 

England

52 Old Steine, Brighton, BN1 1NH, 

England

Alameda ITU 215, Conj 52 Sala 

7, Jardim Paulista, 01421001 Sao 

Paulo

Montecito 38, Piso 16, Oficina 

Dormant

Integrated talent 

management and learning 

100%

solutions

SaaS learning management 

system

SaaS learning management 

system

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

LTG UK MEX SDRL

Mexico

27, WTC, Napoles, Benito Juarez, 

03810 CDMX, Mexico

Learning Technologies Group 

(Colombia) S.A.S.

Colombia

Cr 7 #71 52 To A of 706 Bogotá 

SaaS learning management 

D.C.

system

Breezy HR, Inc.

eThink Education LLC

USA

USA

Corporation Trust Company, 

Corporation Trust Centre, 1209 

SaaS Talent Acquisition 

Orange Street, Wilmington, New 

Platform

Castle DE 19801

c/o Corporation Service 

Company 251 Little Falls Drive 

Wilmington, DE 19808

SaaS learning management 

system

eThink Education Limited

England and Wales

15 Fetter Lane, Ground Floor 

SaaS learning management 

London EC4A 1BW

system

The accounting reference date of each of the subsidiaries is coterminous with that of the Company with the exception of 
PeopleClick Limited whose accounting reference date is 30 September.

30. Reserves
The share premium account represents the amount received 
on the issue of ordinary shares by the Company in excess of 
their nominal value and is non-distributable.

The merger reserve arose on the acquisition of Learning 
Technologies Group (UK) Limited (formerly LEO Learning 
Limited and Epic Performance Improvement Limited) by 
Epic Group Limited in 1996, and the Company’s reverse 
acquisition of Epic Group Limited. The merger reserve also 
includes the merger relief on the issue of shares to acquire 
Line Communications Holding Limited on 7 April 2014, 
Preloaded Limited on 12 May 2014, Eukleia Training Limited on 
31 July 2015 and Rustici Software LLC on 29 January 2016.

The reverse acquisition reserve was created in accordance 
with IFRS3 ‘Business Combinations’. The reserve arises due 

to the elimination of the Company’s investment in Epic 
Group Limited. Since the shareholders of Epic Group Limited 
became the majority shareholders of the enlarged group, the 
acquisition is accounted for as though there is a continuation 
of the legal subsidiary’s Financial Statements. In reverse 
acquisition accounting, the business combination’s costs are 
deemed to have been incurred by the legal subsidiary.

The share-based payment reserve arises from the 
requirement to value share options in existence at the grant 
date, it is the recognition of the fair value over the vesting 
period (see Note 28).

The translation reserve represents cumulative foreign 
exchange differences arising from the translation of the 
Financial Statements of foreign subsidiaries and is not 
distributable by way of dividends.

31. Related party transactions

Trade balances with joint venture

Total

The amounts due to related parties were unsecured, interest-
free and repayable on demand. 

Balances and transactions between the Company and its 
subsidiaries are eliminated on consolidation and are not 
disclosed in this Note. Balances and transactions between 
the Group and other related parties are disclosed below.

Remuneration of Directors and other transactions

During the year there were no material transactions between 
the Company and the Directors, other than their emoluments 
(disclosed in Note 10) and the payments described below. 
The Directors of the Company are considered to be the key 
management personnel of the entity.

During the normal course of business, the Group purchased 
translation and accommodation services from RWS Group 
Limited totalling £195,000 in the year ended 31 December 
2020 (2019: £428,000). Andrew Brode is the Chairman of 
LTG and RWS Group Limited. The amount due/accrued to 
RWS Group Limited at 31 December 2020 was £54,000 (31 
December 2019: £39,000). These balances are included in 
trade and other payables (refer to Note 22).

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

£’000

£’000

(54)

(54)

(18)

(18)

During the normal course of business, the Group  
purchased consultancy services totalling £nil in the year 
ended 31 December 2020 (2019: £6,000) from Chapple 
by Design, owned by Aimie Chapple, a Non-executive 
Director, on an arm’s length basis. The amount due/accrued 
to Chapple by Design at 31 December 2020 was £nil (31 
December 2019: £nil).

During the normal course of business, the Group received 
services income during the year ended 31 December 2020 
totalling £nil (2019: £2,000) from Piers Lea, an Executive 
Director. The amount due from Piers Lea at 31 December 
2020 was £nil (2019: £2,000).

Transactions with joint venture

During the normal course of business, the Group purchased 
graphics services from its joint venture, LEO Brazil, totalling 
£1,000 and received licence fee income, totalling £10,000 
in the year ended 31 December 2020 (2019: £2,000 and 
£10,000 respectively). 

Holding company

100%

Current

Amount owing (from)/to joint venture/associate:

107  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  108

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

32. Dividends paid

Final dividend paid

Interim dividend paid 

Total

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

£’000

-

5,537

5,537

£’000

2,337

1,670

4,007

Due to the impact of COVID-19, the Board adopted a prudent 
approach to shareholder distributions and postponed the 
2019 final dividend until market conditions normalised. On 
30 October 2020 the Company paid an interim dividend of 
0.25 pence per share (2019: 0.25 pence per share), together 
with the postponed final dividend for 2019 of 0.50 pence; 
amounting to a total dividend payment of £5.6 million. Given 
the robust performance of the Group during the past year the 
Directors propose to pay a final dividend of 0.50 pence per 

share for the year ended 31 December 2020, equating to a 
total payment in respect of the year of 0.75 pence per share 
(2019: 0.75 pence per share).

The proposed final dividend of 0.50 pence per share, 
amounting to a final dividend of c.£3.7m, is not included 
as a liability in these financial statements and, subject 
to shareholder approval, will be paid on 25 June 2021 to 
shareholders on the register at the close of business on 4 
June 2021. The final dividend will be paid gross.

33. Financial instruments 

The Group’s activities are exposed to a variety of market risk (including foreign currency risk, interest rate risk and equity price 
risk), credit risk and liquidity risk. The Group’s overall financial risk management policy focuses on the unpredictability of financial 
markets and seeks to minimise potential adverse effects on its financial performance.

(a) Financial risk management policies

The Group’s policies in respect of the major areas of treasury activity are as follows:-

(i) Market risk

(i) Foreign currency risk

The Group is exposed to foreign currency risk on transactions and balances that are denominated in currencies other 
than Pounds Sterling. The currencies giving rise to this risk are primarily the United States Dollar, Canadian Dollar and Euro. 
Foreign currency risk is monitored closely on an ongoing basis to ensure that the net exposure is at an acceptable level. 

The Group maintains a natural hedge whenever possible, by matching the cash inflows (revenue stream) and cash 
outflows used for purposes such as capital and operational expenditure in the respective currencies.

The carrying amounts of the Group’s foreign currency denominated financial assets and liabilities at the end of year  
were as follows: 

United 
States
Dollar

Brazilian 
Real

Hong Kong
Dollar

Euro

Swiss
Francs

Canadian 
Dollar

Australian
Dollar

Philippine
Peso

Columbian 
Peso

Mexican 
Peso

Japanese 
Yen

Singapore 
Dollar

New 
Zealand 
Dollar

Total

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

34,344

290

459

4,889

377

975

1,634

43

513

153

142

77

97

43,993

39,657

55,520

38,767

-

-

-

379

25

-

41

73

579

5,435

482

1,354

569

-

7

-

-

-

1

5

-

2

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

40,178

63,944

38,774

31 Dec 2020

Financial 
assets

Financial 
liabilities

31 Dec 2019

Financial 
assets

Financial 
liabilities

Foreign currency risk sensitivity analysis

The following table details the sensitivity analysis to possible changes in the relative values of the above financial assets and 
liabilities held in foreign currencies to which the Group is exposed as at the end of each year, with all other variables held 
constant. We have disclosed the material sensitivities above £100,000 below:

Effects on profit after taxation/equity

31 December 2020 
increase/ (decrease)

£’000

United States Dollar:

- Strengthened by 10%

- Weakened by 10%

Euro:

 - Strengthened by 10%

 - Weakened by 10%

Swiss Franc:

 - Strengthened by 10%

 - Weakened by 10%

Canadian Dollar:

- Strengthened by 10%

- Weakened by 10%

Australian Dollar:

- Strengthened by 10%

- Weakened by 10%

(ii) Interest rate risk 

Interest rate risk is the risk that the fair value or future cash 
flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of 
changes in market interest rate. 

Interest rate risk sensitivity analysis 

The Group’s external borrowings at the balance sheet 
date comprise loan facilities on floating interest rates at 
a margin over LIBOR. The Group considers the exposure 
to interest rate risk acceptable.

If the interest rates had been 50 basis points higher and 
all other variables were held constant, the Group’s profit 
for the year ended 31 December 2020 and net assets at 
that date would decrease by £137,000 (2019: £177,000). 
This is attributable to the Group’s exposure to movements 
in interest rate on its variable borrowings.

(ii) Credit risk

The Group’s exposure to credit risk, or the risk of 
counterparties defaulting, arises mainly from trade and 
other receivables. The Group manages its exposure to 
credit risk by the application of credit approvals, credit limits 
and monitoring procedures on an ongoing basis. For other 
financial assets (including cash and bank balances), the 
Group minimises credit risk by dealing exclusively with high 
credit rating counterparties.

31 December 2019 
increase/ (decrease)

£’000

1,675

(1,675)

543

(543)

48

(48)

135

(135)

57

(57)

(531)

531

486

(486)

38

(38)

93

(93)

156

(156)

The Group applies the IFRS 9 simplified approach to 
measuring expected credit losses which uses a lifetime 
expected loss allowance for all trade receivables and 
contract assets.

To measure the expected credit losses, trade receivables 
and contract assets have been grouped based on the 
shared credit risk characteristics and the days past due. 
The contract assets relate to unbilled work in progress and 
have a low risk profile as the Group has the right to bill the 
customer for work completed to date. 

The expected loss rates are based on the historic payment 
profiles of sales and the credit losses experienced within 
this period. The historical loss rates are adjusted to reflect 
current and forward-looking information. Different loss rates 
have been calculated and applied to different business 
units, products and geography. The loss allowance 
calculated is detailed in Note 17.

Credit risk concentration profile

The Group did not have significant credit risk exposure to 
any single counterparty or any group of counterparties 
having similar characteristics (2019: No significant credit 
risk exposure). The Group defines major credit risk as 
exposure to a concentration exceeding 10% of a total 
class of such asset.

109  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  110

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

Exposure to credit risk

Ageing analysis

As the Group does not hold any collateral, the maximum exposure to credit risk is represented by the carrying amount of the 
financial assets as at the end of each reporting period.

The table below summarises the maturity profile of the Group’s financial liabilities, including interest payments, where 
applicable based on contractual undiscounted payments:

The exposure of credit risk for trade receivables by 
geographical region is as follows:

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

Less than 1 year

1-2 years

2-3 years

>3 years

Total

United Kingdom

North America

Europe

Asia Pacific

Middle East and Africa

South and Central America

Allowance for impairment losses

Ageing analysis

The ageing analysis of the Group’s trade receivables is as follows:

Not past due

Past due:

Less than three months

Three to six months

Past six months

Gross amount

£’000

3,510

22,892

3,443

2,393

755

1,486

(1,495)

32,984

£’000

4,124

18,443

3,497

980

2,521

250

(904)

28,911

Year ended 31 December 2020

Trade payables

Borrowings

Contingent consideration

Lease payments

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

Year ended 31 December 2019

£’000

21,229

6,333

4,241

2,676

34,479

£’000

21,904

4,585

842

2,484

29,815

Trade payables

Borrowings

Contingent consideration

Lease payments

£’000

£’000 

£’000

£’000

£’000

2,335

7,722

493

2,934

-

7,589

662

2,555

13,484

10,806

1,508

7,127

-

2,818

11,453

-

6,902

-

2,675

9,577

-

3,740

-

2,066

5,806

-

6,677

2,542

2,226

-

-

-

3,810

3,810

2,335

19,051

1,155

11,365

33,906

-

1,508

19,260

39,966

-

2,542

4,737

12,456

11,445

23,997

56,472

Trade receivables that are individually impaired were those 
in significant financial difficulties and have defaulted on 
payments. These receivables are not secured by any 
collateral or credit enhancement.

Collective impairment allowances are determined based 
on estimated irrecoverable amounts from the sale of goods, 
determined by reference to experience of past defaults.

Trade receivables that are past due but not impaired

The Group believes that no impairment allowance is 
necessary in respect of these trade receivables. They are 
substantial companies with good collection track record 
and no recent history of default. 

(iii) Liquidity risk

Refer to Note 24 for a reconciliation of the Group’s net cash / debt position and details of the debt facilities available to the Group.

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will not be able to 
meet its financial obligations as they fall due. The Group’s 
exposure to liquidity risk arises primarily from mismatches of 
the maturities of financial assets and liabilities. There is no 
seasonality to the Group’s liquidity risk.

The Group manages its exposure to liquidity risk by 
reviewing the cash resources required to meet its business 
objectives through both short- and long-term cash flow 
forecasts. The Group maintains a level of cash and cash 
equivalents and bank facilities deemed adequate by 
management to ensure, as far as possible, that it will have 
sufficient liquidity to meet its liabilities when they fall due. 
All Current Liabilities are repayable within one year.

(b) Capital risk management

The Group defines capital as the total equity of the Group 
attributable to the owners of the parent Company and  
net funds. 

The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to 
safeguard its ability to continue as a going concern in order 
to provide returns for shareholders and benefits for other 
stakeholders and to maintain an optimal capital structure to 
reduce the cost of capital and to provide funds for merger 
and acquisition activity.

During the year ended 31 December 2018, the Group fully 
repaid its debt facility with Silicon Valley Bank and replaced 
it with a new debt facility with Silicon Valley Bank and 
Barclays Bank for a total of up to $63m – see Note 24 – this is 
the only external debt finance of the Group.

The Company made dividend distributions of 0.75 pence 
per share during the year ended 31 December 2020 (2019: 
0.60 pence per share).

Total equity increased from £175.5 million to £269.1 million 
during the year and net funds increased from net cash of 
£3.8 million to net cash of £70.2 million. 

111  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  112

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

(c) Classification of financial instruments

Financial assets

Financial assets at amortised cost 

Trade receivables

Amounts recoverable on contracts

Amount owing by related parties

Cash and bank balances

Financial liabilities

Fair value through the profit and loss:

Contingent consideration

At amortised cost:

Trade payables

Borrowings

Lease liability

(d) Reconciliation of liabilities arising from financing activities

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

£’000

£’000

32,984

4,503

54

88,614

126,155

28,911

5,412

18

42,032

76,373

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

£’000

1,155

1,155

2,335

18,412

10,258

31,005

£’000

2,542

2,542

1,508

38,202

11,957

51,667

Note

24

24

1 January 
2020

Net 
financing 
cashflows

Interest 
paid

Fair value 
movement 

Interest 
accrued

Acquisition 

of 

subsidiary

Net 
additions

Foreign 
exchange 
movement

31 
December 
2020

38,202

(18,458)

(750)

11,957

(3,317)

-

-

(1,357)

911

418

196

-

21

-

-

(1,493)

18,412

1,330

(151)

10,258

-

(105)

1,155

-

-

22, 23

2,542

(121)

Borrowings

Lease liabilities

Contingent 
consideration

Borrowings

Lease liabilities

Contingent 
consideration

(e) Fair values of financial instruments

The financial assets and financial liabilities maturing within 
the next 12 months approximate their fair values due to the 
relatively short-term maturity of the financial instruments.

The Group holds certain financial instruments on the 
statement of financial position at their fair value. The 
following table provides an analysis of those that are 
measured subsequent to initial recognition at fair value 
through profit or loss, grouped into levels 1 to 3 based on 
the degree to which the fair value is observable.

•  Level 1 - Fair value measurements are those derived 
from quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for 
identical assets or liabilities;

•  Level 2 - Fair value measurements are those derived 
from inputs other than quoted prices included in level 
1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either 
directly or indirectly (derived from prices); and

•  Level 3 - Fair value measurements are those derived 
from the valuation techniques that include inputs for 

the asset or liability that are not based on observable 
market data (unobservable inputs). The fair value 
of the contingent consideration is calculated using 
actual and forecast results to value the amount which 
will be payable according to the earnout metrics on 
acquisitions. These liabilities are discounted to their 
present value using the Group’s weighted average 
cost of capital of 10%. Both the future cash flows 
and discount rate used are unobservable inputs. 
Management believes that reasonably possible 
changes to the unobservable inputs would not result in 
a significant change in the estimated fair value.

There have been no transfers between these categories in 
the current or preceding year.

The fair value of contingent consideration has been 
adjusted during the year, resulting in a gain of £1,357,000 
which has been recognised within operating expenses 
included in Operating Profit. This has been treated as an 
adjusting item for the purposes of calculating Adjusted 
EBIT, refer to Note 6 for further details.

2020

Contingent consideration

Total

2019

Contingent consideration

Total

Level 1

£’000

-

-

Level 1

£’000

-

-

Level 2

£’000

-

-

Level 2

£’000

-

-

Level 3

£’000

1,155

1,155

Level 3

£’000

2,542

2,542

Total

£’000

1,155

1,155

Total

£’000

2,542

2,542

Note

24

24

1 January 
2019

38,259

14,465

Net 
financing 
cashflows

589

(3,275)

22, 23

2,386

(8)

Interest paid

Fair value 
movement 

Interest 
accrued

Acquisition 

of subsidiary

(1,449)

-

-

-

-

-

1,487

468

248

-

275

-

Foreign 
exchange 
movement

31 
December 
2019

(684)

24

(84)

38,202

11,957

2,542

34. Reclassification of expenses 

The costs outlined below were previously separately disclosed from Operating expenses and/or Operating profit, are now 
included within the Group’s Operating expenses and Operating profit figures. This is to present a more accurate reflection of 
the Operating profit of the group. Prior year results have been restated to provide a consistent comparative.

The loan from Silicon Valley Bank was designated as a hedging instrument in a net investment hedge. As a result, the foreign 
exchange gains and losses on the loan are taken to the other comprehensive income to be offset against the foreign exchange 
gains and losses arising on the retranslation of the net assets of foreign operations.

Refer to Note 24 for details of the loan covenants attached to the loan from Silicon Valley Bank.

Acquisition-related contingent consideration and earn-outs

Acquisition costs

Loss on disposal of fixed assets.

Impact of restatement to Operating expenses

Impact of restatement to Operating profit 

31 Dec 2019

£’000

3,509

249

2

3,760

251

 
 
113  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  114

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

Company Statement of Financial Position (Registered number: 07176993)
As at 31 December 2020

35. Events since the reporting date
Acquisition of Reflektive 

On 1 February 2021, Learning Technologies Group plc 
announced the completion of the acquisition of Reflektive 
Inc (“Reflektive”), a leading performance management 
software provider, from a group of institutional investors for a 
cash consideration of $14.2 million (c.£10.4 million), funded 
from LTG’s cash resources.

Headquartered in San Francisco, Reflektive specialises in 
engagement and analytics tools. It offers a collaborative 
goal-setting, continuous feedback and analytics platform 
used by corporate teams and individuals to provide 
measurable results for boosting productivity, engagement, 
and retention. Reflektive will join LTG’s PeopleFluent business, 
integrating its solution with the existing PeopleFluent talent 
management portfolio. The combination with LTG’s other 
software solutions provides opportunities for cross-sell and 
upsell-led growth.

Acquisition of PDT Global

On 5 February 2021, Learning Technologies Group plc 
acquired UK-based PDT Global (‘The People Development 
Team’), a leading provider of online Diversity and Inclusion 
(D&I) training solutions, for an initial cash consideration of 
£13.2 million funded from LTG’s cash resources. Further 
performance payments capped at £7.0 million are payable 
in cash, based on ambitious incremental revenue growth 
targets in each of the years ending 31st December 2021, 
2022 and 2023.

Acquisition of Bridge

On 1 March 2021, Learning Technologies Group plc, acquired 
getBridge LLC and related assets (“Bridge”), a leading 
learning and talent development software provider, from 
Instructure Inc for a cash consideration of $50.0 million 
(c.£36.1 million), funded from LTG’s existing cash resources.

Bridge is a learning, performance and skills development 
platform for mid-enterprise organisations, headquartered in 
the US with operations in the UK and Hungary. Bridge provides 
a learning management system in addition to performance, 
engagement and skills development products, on a single, 
easy-to-use, SaaS-based platform.

The acquisition of Bridge significantly extends LTG’s mid-
enterprise learning and talent offering. Bridge is highly 
complementary to PeopleFluent, which serves the large 
enterprise market, and Breezy HR, which serves the small and 
medium-sized business market. The acquisition is strategically 
important because it enables LTG to provide a holistic 
learning and talent development offering to meet the needs 
of small, mid-size and large enterprises, three distinct groups 
with varying requirements. The combination and integration 
of Bridge with LTG’s other portfolio offerings, including the 
recently acquired Reflektive engagement and analytics 
platform, will create opportunities for cross-sell and upsell-led 
growth within the Group.

The purchase price allocation exercises for each of the 
above acquisitions will be completed in due course.

There have been no other notifiable events between the 31 
December 2020 and the date of this Annual Report.

Note

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

£’000

£’000

3

4

7

8

5

6

6

6

155,820

155,820

93,753

39,562

133,315

8,119

8,119

125,196

281,016

11,073

269,943

2,853

231,631

9,714

7,439

18,306

269,943

152,297

152,297

46,654

17,886

64,540

7,018

7,018

57,522

209,819

31,858

177,961

2,509

148,176

9,714

4,411

13,151

177,961

Non-current:

Investment in subsidiaries

Current assets:

Trade and other receivables

Cash and bank balances

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Net current assets

Total assets less current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Net Assets

Capital and reserves:

Share capital

Share premium account

Merger reserve

Share-based payments reserve

Retained profits 

Capital and reserves includes profit or (loss) for the year of the 
parent company, of £10.379 million (2019 - (£0.724) million).

The Notes on pages 116 to 119 form an integral part of these 
Financial Statements. 

The Financial Statements on pages 114 to 119 were approved 
and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 24 
March 2021 and were signed on its behalf by:

Neil Elton
Chief Financial Officer

24 March 2021

115  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  116

Company Statement of Changes in Equity

For the year ended 31 December 2019

Notes to the Company Financial Statements 

For the year ended 31 December 2020

Share capital

Share premium Merger reserve

Note

Share-based 
payments 
reserve

Retained
profits

Total

£’000

2,501

£’000

147,520

£’000

9,714

£’000

1,606

£’000

£’000

17,576

178,917

5

10

5

10

-

-

-

8

-

-

-

8

-

-

-

656

-

-

-

656

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2,509

148,176

9,714

-

-

-

-

-

-

344

83,455

-

-

-

-

-

-

344

2,853

83,455

231,631

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

9,714

-

-

-

-

-

3,111

(306)

2,805

4,411

-

-

-

-

-

3,341

(313)

3,028

7,439

(724)

-

(724)

-

(4,007)

-

306

(3,701)

13,151

10,379

-

(724)

-

(724)

664

(4,007)

3,111

-

(232)

177,961

10,379

-

10,379

10,379

-

(5,537)

-

313

(5,224)

18,306

83,799

(5,537)

3,341

-

81,603

269,943

At 1 January 2019

Profit for the year

Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive income for 
the period

Issue of shares

Payment of dividends

Share-based payment charge credited 
to equity

Transfer on exercise and lapse of 
options

Transactions with owners

At 31 December 2019

Profit for the year

Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive income for 
the period

Issue of shares

Payment of dividends

Share-based payment charge credited 
to equity

Transfer on exercise and lapse of 
options

Transactions with owners

At 31 December 2020

1. General information

The Company is a public limited company, which is listed 
on the AIM Market of the London Stock Exchange and 
domiciled in England and incorporated and registered in 
England and Wales. The address of its registered office is 
15 Fetter Lane, London EC4A 1BW. The registered number of 
the Company is 07176993.

The Company has taken advantage of the following 
disclosure exemptions in preparing these financial 
statements, as permitted by FRS 102 “The Financial 
Reporting Standard applicable in the UK and Republic  
of Ireland”:

• 

• 

the requirements of Section 7 Statement of Cash Flows

the requirements of Section 11 Financial Instruments

2. Summary of significant accounting 
policies

(a) Basis of preparation

The Company’s Financial Statements have been prepared 
in accordance with applicable law and accounting 
standards in the United Kingdom and under the historical 
cost accounting rules (Generally Accepted Accounting 
Practice in the United Kingdom). 

The Directors have assessed the Company’s ability to 
continue in operational existence for the foreseeable 
future in accordance with the FRC guidance on the going 
concern basis of accounting and reporting on solvency 
and liquidity risks (April 2016). It is considered appropriate to 
continue to prepare the Financial Statements on a going 
concern basis. 

These financial statements have been prepared in 
accordance with applicable United Kingdom accounting 
standards, including Financial Reporting Standard 102 – 
‘The Financial Reporting Standard applicable in the United 
Kingdom and Republic of Ireland’ (‘FRS 102’), and with 
the Companies Act 2006. The financial statements have 
been prepared on the historical cost basis except for 
the modification to a fair value basis for certain financial 
instruments as specified in the accounting policies below.

The Company has taken advantage of Section 408 of the 
Companies Act 2006 and has not included a Profit and 
Loss account in these separate Financial Statements. The 
profit attributable to members of the Company for the year 
ended 31 December 2020 is £10,379,000 (year ended 31 
December 2019: loss of £724,000).

(b) Fixed asset investments

Fixed asset investments in Group undertakings are carried 
at cost less any provision for impairment. 

(c) Foreign currencies

Transactions in foreign currencies are recorded using the 
rate of exchange ruling at the date of the transaction. 
Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign 
currencies are translated using the contracted rate or the 
rate of exchange ruling at the balance sheet date and 
the gains or losses on translation are included in the profit 
and loss account.

(d) Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash in hand, bank 
balances, deposits with financial institutions and short-
term, highly liquid investments that are readily convertible 
to known amounts of cash and which are subject to an 
insignificant risk of change in value.

(e) Income taxes

The charge for taxation is based on the profit/loss for the 
year and takes into account taxation deferred because 
of timing differences between the treatment of certain 
items for taxation and accounting purposes.

Deferred tax is recognised in respect of all timing 
differences between the treatment of certain items for 
taxation and accounting purposes which have arisen but 
not reversed by the balance sheet date.

(f) Pensions

The policy for the Company’s defined contribution plan 
can be found in Note 2 of the Consolidated Accounts.

(g) Share-based payment arrangements 

The policy for the Company’s share-based payment 
arrangements can be found in Note 2 of the 
Consolidated Financial Statements.

117  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  118

Notes to the Company Financial Statements (continued)

For the year ended 31 December 2019

3. Investment in subsidiaries

Cost

At 1 January

Additions

Disposals

At 31 December

Amortisation/impairment:

At 1 January

Provision for impairment

Disposals

At 31 December

Net Book Value

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

£’000

£’000

152,297

3,523

-

155,820

-

-

-

-

164,404

3,015

(15,122)

152,297

-

-

-

-

155,820

152,297

In 2019, the Company transferred its investments in Preloaded Limited and Eukleia Training Limited to its subsidiary, Learning 
Technologies Group (UK) Limited, as part of a Group restructuring project.

Details of the Company’s subsidiaries as at 31 December 2020 are set out in Note 29 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

4. Trade and other receivables

Amounts due from subsidiary undertakings

Other debtors

Other debtors

5. Share capital

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

£’000

93,725

-

28

£’000

46,627

-

27

93,723

46,654

Details of the Company’s authorised, called-up and fully paid share capital are set out in Note 27 to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements.

The ordinary shares of the Company carry one vote per share and an equal right to any dividends declared.

Additions in the year relates to the recognition of share based payment transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries.

Borrowings

Trade creditors

Other creditors and accruals

6. Reserves

The share-based payment reserve arises from the requirement to value share options in existence at the fair value at the date 
they are granted, it is the recognition of the fair value over the vesting period. 

The share premium account represents the amount received on the issue of ordinary shares by the Company, other than those 
recognised in the merger reserve described below, in excess of their nominal value and is non-distributable. 

The merger reserve represents the amount received on the issue of ordinary shares by the Company in excess of their nominal 
value on acquisition of subsidiaries where merger relief under section 612 of the Companies Act 2006 applies. The merger 
reserve consists of the merger relief on the issue of shares to acquire Line Communications Holding Limited on 7 April 2014, 
Preloaded Limited on 12 May 2014, Eukleia Training Limited on 31 July 2015 and Rustici Software LLC on 29 January 2016.

7. Trade payables: amounts falling due within one year

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

£’000

180

600

7,339

8,119

£’000

85

589

6,344

7,018

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

£’000

11,073

11,073

£’000

31,858

31,858

8. Trade payables: amounts falling due after more 

than one year

Borrowings

The interest expense relating to the movement in present value of contingent consideration in the year ending 31 December 
2020 amounted to £nil (2019: £ nil).

Refer to Note 24 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for further details of the Company’s borrowings.

 
119  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  120

Notes to the Company Financial Statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

Glossary

9. Related party transactions

Alternative Performance Measures

The only key management personnel of the Company are the Directors. Details of their remuneration are contained in Note 10 
to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

The following transactions with subsidiaries occurred in the year

31 Dec 2020

31 Dec 2019

Opening amount due from related parties

Amounts (repaid) by related parties

Amounts advanced from related parties

Management recharges

Interest charged on loans

Foreign exchange differences

Closing amount due from related parties

£’000

46,627

(75,067)

118,584

1,852

2,394

(665)

93,725

£’000

49,919

(40,361)

35,754

454

2,157

(1,296)

46,627

In reporting financial information, the Group presents alternative performance measures, “APMs”, which are not defined or 
specified under the requirements of IFRS. The Group believes that these APMs, which are not considered to be a substitute for 
or superior to IFRS measures, provide stakeholders with additional useful information on the underlying trends, performance 
and position of the Group and are consistent with how business performance is measured internally. The alternative 
performance measures are not defined by IFRS and therefore may not be directly comparable with other companies’ 
alternative performance measures. The key APMs that the Group uses are outlined below.

APM

Closest 
equivalent IFRS 
measure

Reconciling 
items to IFRS 
measure

Definition and purpose

Income Statement Measures

The amounts owing to/from related parties are unsecured, interest-free and repayable on demand. 

Adjusted EBIT

Operating 
profit

Adjusting items

Adjusted EBIT excludes adjusting items. A reconciliation from Adjusted EBIT to Operating profit is 
provided in the Consolidated statement of comprehensive income on page 60. 

10. Share-based payments

Details of the group share-based plans are contained in Note 28 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

The Company operates an Approved share option plan. The Company’s share-based payment arrangements are 
summarised below.

An option-holder has no voting or dividend rights in the Company before the exercise of a share option.

No options were exercised during the year (2019: nil options). No options were granted, forfeited or expired during the  
year (2019: nil)

The number of options that are exercisable at 31 December 2020 is nil (2019: nil).

Share-based payments which were expensed in the entity and taken to equity in the year ended 31 December 2020, 
amounted to £nil (year ended 31 December 2019: £nil). The remaining difference between the share-based payments  
which were expensed as per Note 28 and the entity, relate to the options over the Company’s share capital held by 
employees of subsidiaries. 

11. Dividends paid

Disclosure of dividends paid can be found in Note 32 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

12. Subsequent events

Disclosures in relation to events after 31 December 2020 are shown in Note 35 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Adjusting items 

None

Refer to 
definition

Items which are not considered part of the normal operating costs of the business, are 
separately disclosed because of their size, nature or incidence are treated as adjusting. The 
Group believes the separate disclosure of these items provides additional useful information to 
users of the financial statements to enable a better understanding of the Group’s underlying 
financial performance. An explanation of the nature of the items identified as adjusting is 
provided in Note 6 to the financial statements.

Recurring 
revenue

Revenue

Refer Note 5

Recurring revenue is defined as the revenue streams of the Group that are predictable and 
expected to continue into the future upon customer renewal.

Non-recurring 
revenue

Revenue

Refer Note 5

Non-recurring revenue is defined as the revenue streams of the Group that arise from one-off 
fees or services that may or may not happen again.

Balance Sheet Measures

Net cash or 
debt

None

Refer to Note 
24

Net cash / debt is defined as Cash and cash equivalents and short-term deposits, less Bank 
overdrafts and other current and non-current borrowings. A reconciliation is provided in Note 24 
to the financial statements.

Shareholders’ 
funds

None

Refer to 
definition

Calculated as Total Equity at the end of the period/year divided by the number of shares on 
issue at the end of the period/year. The shares on issue at 31st December 2019 were 669,120,088 
and 739,297,410 at 31st December 2020, please refer to on Note 27.

121  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  122
 plc Annual Report 2020  122

Company Information

Directors

Simon Boddie, Non-executive Director
Andrew Brode, Non-executive Chairman
Aimie Chapple, Non-executive Director
Neil Elton, Chief Financial Officer
Piers Lea, Chief Strategy Officer
Leslie-Ann Reed, Non-executive Director
Jonathan Satchell, Chief Executive

Company Secretary

Claire Walsh

Company number

07176993

Registered address

15 Fetter Lane 
London 
EC4A 1BW

Joint broker

Goldman Sachs 
Plumtree Court 
25 Shoe Lane  
London  
EC4A 4AU

Legal advisers

DLA Piper U.K. LLP 
160 Aldersgate Street 
London  
EC1A 4HT

Registrar

Computershare Investor Services plc 
The Pavilions 
Bridgewater Road 
Bristol BS13 8AE

Independent auditor

BDO LLP 
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors 
55 Baker Street 
London  
W1U 7EU

Principal banker

Silicon Valley Bank 
Alphabeta 
14-18 Finsbury Square 
London  
EC2A 1BR

Nominated adviser and joint broker

Communications consultancy

Numis Securities Limited 
10 Paternoster Square 
London  
EC4M 7LT

FTI Consulting LLP 
200 Aldersgate 
Aldersgate Street 
London  
EC1A 4HD

123  

 plc Annual Report 2020

 plc Annual Report 2020  124
 plc Annual Report 2020  124